JP7177483B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine having control means capable of generating a game state advantageous to a player according to the result of a game.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are gaming machines that can change setting values according to game-related settings (for example,
Patent document 1).

JP-A-6-238056

However, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in countermeasures for when an abnormality occurs during restart processing when power is restored after a power failure occurs during a special game state.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to notify an abnormality of a gaming machine when power is restored.

According to a typical aspect of the present invention, in a gaming machine equipped with control means capable of generating a gaming state advantageous to a player according to the result of a game , the performance of the gaming machine calculated based on input information. a display means capable of displaying a display related to the game, and holding and storing means capable of storing the information about the game including the input information and the information about the performance , and capable of storing and holding the stored information even if a power failure occurs. The control means is capable of outputting a plurality of signals triggered by the occurrence of a game state advantageous to the player, and the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the game state advantageous to the player. When an abnormality in the game-related information stored in the holding/storage means is detected during the actual restart process, a security signal for informing the abnormality is output, and none of the plurality of signals are output. a game can be started after the holding storage means is initialized, and a display regarding the performance can be displayed on the display means based on the information regarding the performance stored before power is restored; The input information in the holding and storing means is updated by timer interrupt processing executed at a predetermined cycle, and the performance-related information in the holding and storing means is updated in a state in which interrupts are prohibited.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to notify an abnormality of a gaming machine when power is restored.

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of game control. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing; It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a performance display apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information determination processing (second half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a look-ahead big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (first half). It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (second half). It is a flowchart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 1 normal processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fall lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a table which illustrates big hit probability, small hit probability, and fall probability. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a table exemplifying the distribution of types of jackpots. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of Toku-zu 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a time reduction variation count update process; FIG. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the process during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the processing during special figure 2 display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fanfare/interval processing (first half); FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare/interval processing (second half); FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big-hit completion|finish setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big-hit completion|finish setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing. 9 is a time chart of a setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment; 9 is a table showing an example of the reliability of setting suggestion effects according to the first embodiment; It is an example of the table|surface which shows the relationship between the setting suggestion production|presentation which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and a big hit. FIG. 10 is a screen transition diagram of a setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a time chart of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment; 9 is a time chart of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of another setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram illustrating another example of setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment; It is the table|surface which shows the correspondence of the setting value for work of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment, the probability setting value for a display (examples 1, 2, 3, and 4 of a setting), and production|presentation control information. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting values of setting example 3 or setting example 4 of the gaming machine of the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a first modified example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment; FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of the display probability setting values of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing a third modification of the display mode of the display probability set value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing a fourth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing a fifth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a procedure of hole/player setting mode processing according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a front view of the game board in a setting change state according to the third embodiment; It is another example of the front view of the game board in the setting change state according to the third embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. at the time of the special game state of the normal operation according to the fourth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc., when a power failure occurs during the special game state according to the fourth embodiment and the power is restored to normal. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment and a memory abnormality occurs when power is restored. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc., when a power failure occurs during the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, and the power is restored to normal and the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, normal recovery is performed by power restoration, and the transition to the setting change state is performed. A timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when power is turned off after a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, normal restoration is performed when the power is restored, and the power is turned off after shifting to the setting change state. is.

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to an island facility via a hinge so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 .

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 1 capable of emitting light according to the game state are provided.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs therein, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes a performance device that performs lighting effects and the like in accordance with the progress of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The illumination member disposed inside also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball shooting device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a performance operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light-emitting performance or the like according to the game state. .

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided in the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operating device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable state, probability variable state), a big hit state (
Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate the probability variable state may be always generated when the big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the probability variable state by the big hit pattern random number, or a prize winning device having a specific area may be provided and specified. A variable probability state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball rental operation device includes a ball rental button 27 and a return button 28.
, and a balance display unit 26 . A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player. The balance display portion 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Beneath the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball shooting device (not shown) and a game ball capable of being stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24 , the ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device has a momentum (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area.
can be changed according to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be shot in various shooting modes with different shooting momentum. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 is arranged below the upper tray unit with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0a. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin.
A game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the . The gaming machine 10
A game is played by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31. - 特許庁In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game. At the rear of the window formed in the center case 40, there is an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is equipped with a game ball flowing down the game area 32 .
An inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball to the inside and a stage portion 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable prize winning device 37,
A game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is likely to enter the starting prize winning port 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37.例文帳に追加

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board rendering device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls to these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that provides a condition for starting the special figure variation display game. center case 40
In the game area 32 on the right side of the normal figure start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessories, normal electric) equipped with a second start winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that slides from the front toward the back side to convert the state into a state in which game balls can easily flow in. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加
When the game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. A game ball is more likely to enter the start winning hole 36 when hitting to the left, and a game ball is more likely to enter the normal variable winning device 37 when hitting to the right.

The movable member 37b is a slide open/close type normal electric accessory, and operates via a normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (win easy state advantageous to the player) in which game balls tend to flow into the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or makes the hit probability of the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state, or normal game state. By making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in , a time saving state (general electric support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, the variable state (
Even in the latent probability variable state), a time-saving state (general electric support state) will occur.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a lower big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7)
A first special variable prize winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an attacker type open/close door 38c that opens a lower prize winning opening by retracting from the front to the back side is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state in which the large winning port is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize balls) is awarded to the player. A lower special winning opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided in the lower special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable prize winning device 38 makes it easier for a game ball to win a prize when hitting to the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, there is an upper big winning opening solenoid 39b (Fig. 3
), there is provided a second special variable winning device 39 having an opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper big winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right. Second special variable winning device 39
, depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the state of closing the big prize hole (disadvantageous closed state for the player) is changed to the open state (advantageous special game state for the player), and the game ball into the big prize hole By facilitating the inflow of the game, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. An upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for the game ball to win when hitting to the right. Also, the lower special winning opening switch 38a and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as a special winning opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 . When the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (
High probability state, specific game state) is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only in the case of a variable probability big hit so that the game ball can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100 can detect passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. While confirming to do, it transmits information (specific area passing command etc.) indicating that there was a V prize to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 displays the V prize on the display device 4
1 and so on.

General winning gate 35, starting winning gate 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 38
, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls from the payout device to the upper tray 21 according to the type of the winning prize opening. In addition, the lower game area 32 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a prize winning port. In addition, the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, and their vicinity are provided with LEDs (board decoration device to be described later) that can emit light when a game ball wins a prize. 46) are provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure variation for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), variation display unit 53 for normal figure variation display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each variation display game Storage display unit for notifying the number of memories (special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, general figure reservation indicator 56
) and The special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
Special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is configured by lamps D13 and D14. Normal map holding display 56
is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D7),
A second game state display unit 58 (second game state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability state of a big hit becomes a high probability state. 3rd game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D9) for displaying that the game is on, and the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed) is displayed. A round display portion 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such segment type display units,
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing a variable display, all LEDs provided as indicators may be all lit and all extinguished (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), or cyclic lighting (any One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or a predetermined number of LEDs out of a plurality of LEDs may be lit and extinguished (blinking) or cyclically lit. Also in the normal figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal figure indicator 53 is also the special figure 1 indicator 5
1. It is possible to configure appropriately in the same manner as the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and light-off display as symbols (fourth special symbols to be described later), and start of each special symbol variation display game. (Holding) It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of memories. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the general figure indicator 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the production control device 300 (described later).

Lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1, special figure 1 reserved LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserved number (first start memory number) by a combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 pending LED1, special figure 2 pending LED2) display the special figure 2 pending number (second start memory number) by a combination of off state, lit state, and blinking state do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of reservations due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of reservations in cases other than the state of the big hit (including the case where a reach, which will be described later, occurs on the display device 41). conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34, a general prize winning opening 35, and a starting winning opening. 36, wins a normal variable winning device 37 or special variable winning devices 38, 39, or flows into an out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when game balls enter the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning hole enters the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 through.

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

The normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal pattern fluctuation display A game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game balls to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the start prize opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
The game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as starting winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored up to the predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the display device 4
1 is also displayed on the display screen.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100, based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory, the special figure 2 on the special figure 2 indicator 52
Run the floating display game.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variation machine, and the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be set to a running state at the same time (both) independently of each other. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variation display game (the special figure 1 variation display game does not have a small hit in this embodiment), the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result. do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result.

When a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted, and the special figure 1
Derivation of the result of the variable display game (display of the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number) is postponed, and after the small hit operation regarding the special figure 2 variable display game is completed, the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game can be resumed. .

In addition, when the game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 by hitting to the right in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game starts to vary, but basically it varies for a long time (long variation, for example, 10 minutes). is performed, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this time, it will be forcibly lost and stopped.

Also, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of characters to enhance interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating (blinking) the lighting display and the extinguishing display. fluctuate. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 stops with "lights out" in the case of a loss, and "lights up" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. Also, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game may simultaneously take a running state (running state).

When the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the jackpot state (
special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 38, 39 is the big winning opening solenoid (38b, 39b) (
3), the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). In other words, the special variable winning device 38, 39 has a special winning opening that opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, during which time the player can win a lot of game balls. Granted.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), a special figure fluctuation display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived by the display pattern, and a small win state is entered. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, although a big hit random number value is used also for determination of a small hit, a small hit value (small hit determination value) differs from a big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are operated by the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (Fig. 3).
), the large winning opening is changed from closed to open for a predetermined short period of time.
In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning game state) than in the big winning state (special game state), the game in which the player can win more in the small winning state than in the big winning state The value (the number of acquired balls) is small. In both the small winning state and the big winning state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big winning state may be called the first special game state, and the small winning state may be called the second special game state.

Here, the difference between the big win and the small win will be explained.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag is set for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38,39. The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. note that,"
The condition device may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. is released.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set to

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

Also, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36
a, The starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switches (38a, 39a) in the normal variable prize winning device 37 are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and when metal approaches the coils, a magnetic field is generated. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a changing phenomenon is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and has a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operating clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for the random number generation circuit, and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting the .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate substrate or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated,
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the game microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
It is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 . When the setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotating operation or the like, the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the setting regarding the game condition (game) can be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit, but other game conditions (such as effects) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are
A setting change means (setting change device 42) capable of changing settings (probability setting values) relating to game conditions is configured. Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that they cannot be operated (inaccessible positions) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 .

As will be described later, when the game machine 10 is turned on (recovery from power failure, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which probability setting values can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined, for example, in six stages, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most favorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is changed to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → It is changed as follows. Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For the convenience of explanation, work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting values and probability setting values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them to a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (making the working set value and the probability set value the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, displays the probability setting values for display corresponding to the selected working setting values 0 to 5, for example. etc.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores constant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. can be held and stored. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-win state includes a plurality of ready-to-win effects, and the systems (types) of ready-to-win effects with different possibilities (different expectations) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode) are normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach.
The degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit increases in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device, and output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. A random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining pattern random numbers and variation patterns in special figure variation display games (including the execution time of variation display games in various reach and non-reach variation displays) and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 11
1a constitutes variation distribution information acquiring means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. Switch 36a, starter 2 switch 37a in second starter winning port 37 (ordinary variable winning device), winning port switch 35a of general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38
, 39 big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a
), and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
, and is provided with an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 and the out ball detection switch 74 . Specific area switch 72
, detects passage of a game ball (V winning) to a specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects game balls passing through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only game balls passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. Switch 63, a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., vibration sensor 6 for detecting vibration of game machine 10
5 is input.

Also, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided for taking in signals from 12 and supplying them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140 . The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST noise-removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111, and the output section 13
0 to each port. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is applied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input section 120.
, 124. The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) for opening the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), an upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and a lever solenoid 86b that operates a lever and opens a specific area 86 for outputting opening/closing data. Two output ports 134 are provided.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 includes a general-purpose solenoid 37 output from a second output port 134.
A first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives an opening/closing data signal for the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, etc., generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, and a current supply for the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135. A second driver 138b for outputting an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the side, and a third driver for outputting an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. 138c and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the collective display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. A fourth terminal for outputting an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
Driver 138d is supplied with 12V DC to provide a 12V level to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134, and outputs a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 is provided for driving. In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 consists of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. is not limited to

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board).
It may be provided in other places. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability set value, a role ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
is the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning hole (the number of winning prizes) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out hole 30b. The number of ejected balls is counted by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 etc.
can be obtained by In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning opening 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2
), and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings).

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls),
Number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) x 100 (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
2 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. FIG.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111 , determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video,
It performs processing such as instructing playback sound to, lighting decorative lamps, driving control of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which voice data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Command I/F3
Via 31, received decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from game control device 100 to production control device 300 as production control command signal (production command). . The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40).
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built into the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor inside the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . In addition, DC-
A DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the random number for the hit judgment of the normal pattern is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b. It is compared with the judgment value that is set, and the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display device, the normal pattern variability display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. If the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result mode of the loss on the normal pattern display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable probability state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time reduction state, control is performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 per unit time is higher than when the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. is controlled so that the opening time of the is substantially increased, so it becomes a general electricity support state. In addition, even in the high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, the general electricity support (electricity support) is performed by duplicating the time-saving state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time)
to a second variable display time that is shorter than the normal first variable display time (eg, 10000 msec becomes 1000 msec). In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is also shortened than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game is also performed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the normal pattern stop time to display the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is the first
A second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than the stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a win and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) to be longer.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern variation display game (normal pattern probability) higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thus, in the time-saving state, winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Also, in the normal operating state, the movable member 3
It may be set so as not to open 7b (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transitional state at power-on]
FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining transition states when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (power is restored). As described above, depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, there are four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, a setting variable state (setting change state,
setting change mode) (see A1027-A1036 in FIG. 6B and FIG. 8).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered (Fig. 6B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 8).

When the power is turned on, although the setting key switch 93 is off, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 is turned on, transition to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode);
AM initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 6B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 includes main processing mainly shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, and processing shown in FIG.
It consists of timer interrupt processing shown in . That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. .

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 6A and 6B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 6A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to the prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 serving as main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in a power delay timer
00 to perform various controls according to the instructions from the sub-control means (e.g., payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) to wait until the program is normally started (e.g., 3
seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub-control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3
00 etc.) for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for activation.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area,
Since it is not necessary to perform calculation while excluding the AM region, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated when the power is turned on.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time starts, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, even without performing such troublesome operations, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on can be prevented. can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the timing of the waiting time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (from A1008 to A
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus, and determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). If a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), wait until the game machine is powered off.

If the game control device 100 does not have a power failure (result of A1008 is "N")
, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), the game control device 100
), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (no output state). (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013 ).

Further, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized here. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial settings to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150 . For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of performance display device 152 . The game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used for the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a CTC (Counter/Timer C) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
ircuit) Activate the circuit (A1014). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP based on the frequency-divided signal.
For U111a, there is provided a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a random number update trigger that is supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Then, the game control device 100, RAM (here RAM111c) indicating the abnormality of RA
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an anomaly is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
6 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), a checksum for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, game control work area) in the RWM Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, indicating that the RAM is abnormal.
Clear the abnormal flag (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N", or the result of A1017 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 uses the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112
are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 resets the RAM (RAM
111c) is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality is set (A102).
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
1-Probability setting confirmation process in A1037 (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
041, A1045, and A1046 are executed when the power is turned on (when the power is restored).

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023
result is "Y"), a command of main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024)
. The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification is the game control device 10
0 anomaly is reported.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped ("E1
error display data) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 so as to be displayed on the performance display device 152 (A1025). Then, ON data of a security signal for notifying the abnormality to an external device (playground internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) is performed again.
12) and wait for the power to be turned on. It should be noted that, while waiting to repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), timer interrupt processing that can execute special figure 1, 2 game processing and general figure game processing (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, games (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, setting change operations (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
If the probability setting changing flag is set even though the two ON operations are not executed, it is assumed that there is an abnormality, and the processing of A1024 to A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation is not performed. be.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102
The result of 2 is "Y"), the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7 segments when the game is stopped. Display data (error display data of "E1" in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and in order to inform the external device of the RAM abnormality, the security signal ON data is sent to the external device. Output to the information terminal 71 (A1026). It should be noted that, in the same manner as described above, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. Then step A10
25 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). If the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y
”), since it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value “1”), and then (A1028 ), set the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed (
A1029). If the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N
'), the probability setting change flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1
030), the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirming (setting confirming state) process starts. A probability setting confirming flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the production control device 30
0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being confirmed on the display device 41 or the like.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during probability setting change and during probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1034). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 8) described later. The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321).
The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. on the other hand,
If a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
61 is executed when a power failure occurs.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power failure has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036
The result is "Y"), prohibits the interruption (A1038), and transmits a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). In addition, the effect|presentation control apparatus 300 which received the command of the information completion|finish complete|finishes the information that it is during probability setting confirmation or probability setting change.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changed so far, RAM initialization processing (described later) of steps A1042 to A1044 is executed. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed until now, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored) normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041).
. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is "Y"), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability set values stored in the probability set value area. Furthermore, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. . The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to production control device 300 (production control board) (A1044), it moves to the processing of step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
041 result is "N"), the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are both off, so normal power-on (power recovery) processing is started, and power failure recovery processing is executed ( A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of restoration from power failure (at the time of power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirming flag is also cleared here. Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1046), step A10
47 is processed.

In addition, the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, special figures 1 and 2 pending Decoration special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating the number, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure fluctuation in predetermined production mode It includes a number-of-effects information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Further, the RAM initialization command and the power failure recovery command include a set value information command (probability set value information command) indicating set value information that is information on the probability set value (set value) of the game machine 10. be The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command is, for example,
A customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, and RAM
Notification of initialization (RAM clearing) is performed for 30 seconds. Further, the command for restoration from power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41 . In addition, the command for specifying the screen is during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor hitting)
, is a customer waiting demo command, otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C
The CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register). Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers Initial value (big hit design initial value random number), initial value of small hit design random number that determines the small hit design (small hit design initial value random number), initial value of hit random number that determines the hit of the general pattern (hit initial value random number) , the initial value of the drop lottery random number used in the drop lottery (the initial value of the drop lottery random number, etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as the start value (A1048), and the interrupt is permitted (A10).
49). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. there is however,
The jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU. CTC output with the same period (CTC of timer interrupt processing (
It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2)) that is different from CTC0).

In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, winning pattern random number, and falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. ing. Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. In other words, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random numbers, winning random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (accessory ratio, payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Also, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred (A1054).
If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050 to A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A
1058). Further, checksum calculation processing is executed to calculate the checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
. Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, takes in signals,
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being checked (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is "Y"), probability setting change/confirmation processing for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

If the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A130
4 is "N"), and based on the output data set in various processes, output processing for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), further random number update process 1 (A1308), random number update Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower special winning port switch 38a, and the upper special winning port switch 39a, and the monitoring of errors. (Whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) Winning hole switch/status monitoring processing is executed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether abnormal ejection of game balls is occurring in the big winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. If the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is "Y"), the processing from step A1317 onwards is executed.

The game control device 100, when abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N")
, a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A1312). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game processing for performing the processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A1313), and then the special figure 2 game processing for performing processing relating to the special figure 2 variation display game is performed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern game processing for performing processing related to the normal pattern fluctuation display game (A1315). A segment LED editing process is executed to drive the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (A1316).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes magnet fraud monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1318).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes vibration fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal ejection monitoring process is executed to monitor abnormal ejection from the big winning opening (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special variable winning device 38, 39 big winning opening switch 43 (lower big winning opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a), specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), remaining ball discharge opening Based on the input from the switch 73, abnormal discharge of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when abnormal discharge occurs, an abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. In addition, special variable winning device 3
The game balls that have passed through the large winning opening switch 43 of 8, 39 pass through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 and are discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1321). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirm process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
Y"), set the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), set the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of probability setting values for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall officials, etc., if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small win probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big win probability (and small win probability). can be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big win probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 1 in step A1034.
28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the external information terminal 71 outputs ON data of a security signal for informing an external device (game hall internal control device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality.
(A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are kept off.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407
result is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

Game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407
result is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

If the game control device 100 is not the first timer interrupt process after turning on the power (A240
8 is "N"), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2
409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

When there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112, the game control device 100 (A2409
result is "Y"), the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability in the probability set value area corresponding to the work set value The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. When entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read out from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the working setting value. The probability setting value (setting value for work) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y").
”), a value corresponding to the work set value in the work set value area may be stored in the probability set value area for the first time. In this way, if a power failure occurs while changing settings (A1037
result is "Y"), the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, performance control, etc. can be prevented from being changed by an unintended value.

[Display example on the performance display device]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display example of the performance display device 152. As shown in FIG. The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment display (8-segment display including dots Dp), and each digit of the performance display device 152 is composed of 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, It consists of f, g, and Dp.

In the example of FIG. 9(a), while the probability setting is being changed, the digits 1 to 3 are illuminated with "SET" to indicate that the setting is being changed. On the other hand, RA during probability setting change
Corresponding to the working set values 0 to 5 which are switched each time the M initialization switch 112 is operated, the display probability set values are switched to, for example, "1" to "6" at the digit 0 and lit.

In the example of FIG. 9(b), if the probability setting value is not within the normal range and is abnormal (the result of A2401 is "N"), the light-off data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the digit 0 is set. goes off. In the digits 1 to 3, the display of "SET" indicating that the setting is being changed is not extinguished.

In the example of FIG. 9(c), if the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on (the result of A1022 is "Y
), or if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed) (A
The result of 1023 is "Y"), the 7-segment display data error display "E1" when the game is stopped is the digit 1
, 2 (A1024).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting port switch monitoring process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning monitoring table for monitoring winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and hard random number acquisition processing for acquiring a hard random number as a jackpot random number. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting opening prize to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703). And if there is no starting prize (A
If the result of 2703 is "N"), the processing moves to step A2709.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting opening winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2703
The result is "Y"), whether the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is low probability and no time saving (no state support), that is, special low probability & no time saving (normal game state) is determined (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that it is in the special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state). And if it is in a low probability state and no time saving state (the result of A2704 is "Y"
), that is, in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step A2707.

The game control device 100, when the probability of occurrence of a big hit is not in a low probability state (when it is in a high probability state) or when it is in a time saving state (state with general electric support) (the result of A2704 is "N"), A right hitting instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300, when there is a starting opening prize to the first starting winning opening 36 in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state, displays the right hitting instruction display as a warning to instruct the right hitting display device 41 can be displayed in Incidentally, in the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 .

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold due to winning to the first start winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708 ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100, the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2)
A starting gate 2 winning monitoring table for monitoring the winning of the game is prepared (A2709), and a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number as a jackpot random number is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start-up prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 (A2711). If there is no starting point winning (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting point switch monitoring process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting entrance winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (A271
If the result of 1 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in operation (normal electric operation) (A2712). When the normal variable winning device 37 is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "
N"), and it is determined whether or not fraud (general/electrical fraud) to the normal variable winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrence judgments (for example, 5 or more), it can be determined that the general electrical fraud is occurring. Ordinary fluctuation winning device 37
is occurring (result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.

If the game control device 100 is not fraudulent with respect to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2
The result of 713 is "N"), prepare a table for setting information on hold due to winning to normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A2714), execute special figure starting port switch common processing (A
2715), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when fraud is occurring to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2
712 is "Y"), the processing of steps A2714 and A2715 is executed without executing the processing of step A2713.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the special figure start switch common processing (A270
8, A2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common processing is the starting port 1 switch 36
This processing is performed in common for each input when there is an input from a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
Save the updated value in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), step A
2905 processing is performed. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) + 1 update Then (A2906), the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a fall lottery random number for lottery for falling from a high probability state of a special figure to a low probability state (A2912), and stores the fall lottery random number. Save in area (A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A2914). If the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is not achieved (the result of A2914 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2917. On the other hand, if it is a prize to the start winning port 36 (the result of A2914 is "Y"), extract the small hit pattern random number and prepare it (A
2915), and save in the RWM's small winning symbol random number storage area (A2916).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2917), and executes special figure reservation information determination processing (A2
918). Then, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2919), production command setting processing (A292
0) is executed to end the special figure starting opening switch common processing. The decoration special figure reservation number command is
In the starting port 1 switch 36a, it is a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command, and the starting port 2 switch 37a
Then, it is a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. again,
The starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit. , various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, special figure holding information determination processing (A2918
) will be described in detail. Figures 12A and 12B are flowcharts showing the first half and second half of special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetching processing, prior determination processing). It should be noted that the special figure reservation information determination process is executed for the special figure 1 and 2 start memory generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 .

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is during a big hit (during a special game state) (A3001). When the jackpot is in progress (the result of A3001 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. If the jackpot is not in progress (the result of A3001 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the winning is to the first starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A3002). If the winning is to the starting gate 1 (the result of A3002 is "Y"), that is, if the winning is to the first starting winning gate 36 (starting gate 1), prefetching processing (preliminary determination processing) is executed. Therefore, step A3004
Move to the subsequent processing.

When the game control device 100 is not winning the starting port 1 (the result of A3002 is "N"),
Whether the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a low probability state and no time saving state (state without general electric support), that is, whether it is a special low probability & no time saving medium (normal game state) judge(
A3003). When there is no special figure low probability & time saving (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) in the normal game state
In the case of winning a prize, the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated without executing the look-ahead process (preliminary determination process). In addition, in the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a long fluctuation (long fluctuation) and is often forced to end as a result of losing. do not run

If the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & short working hours (the result of A3003 is "
N"), that is, in the case of winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) other than the normal gaming state (time saving state or probability variable state), step A3004 to execute the prefetching process (preliminary determination process) Move to the subsequent processing.

Then, the game control device 100 starts a look-ahead process (preliminary determination process) and determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a high probability state, that is, whether or not a special figure high probability is in progress (A3004).
). When a special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, a special figure high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. If it is in the special high probability (the result of A3004 is "Y"), it is determined whether the falling lottery random number prepared in step A2912 is within the judgment value range of falling winning (A3005), and the predictive falling lottery corresponding to the judgment result An information command is prepared as an effect command (A3006), and an effect command setting process is performed (A3007). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a low-probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead big hit determination in a low-probability state (A3008). If it is not in the special high probability (A3
The result of 004 is "N"), and since there is no falling from a high probability state to a low probability state in the first place, the process proceeds to step A3008 without executing prefetching processing (A3005-A3007) regarding falling.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a look-ahead big-hit determination process, which will be described later, based on the big-hit random number prepared in step A2909 (A3009), and determines whether or not the result of the look-ahead big-hit determination process is a big hit (A3010). ). If the judgment result is a big hit (A3
010 result is "Y"), the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a or starting port 2
A jackpot pattern random number check table corresponding to the switch 37a) is set (A3011),
Acquire stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number (A3012), step A3
019 processing is started.

Game control device 100, when the determination result of the look-ahead big hit determination process is lost (A3
If the result of 010 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the winning is to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A3013). In the case of winning the start gate 2 (the result of A3013 is "Y"),
Since a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed by winning the starting port 2, a small hit determination process described later is executed as a look-ahead process related to the small hit (A3014),
It is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3015). Then, if the judgment result is a small hit (the result of A3015 is "Y"), a small hit pattern random number check table is set (A3016), and stop pattern information corresponding to the prepared small hit pattern random number is acquired ( A3017), and the process proceeds to step A3019.

When the game control device 100 is not winning to the starting port 2 (the result of A3013 is "N")
, Since it is not possible to generate a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3018). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the misplaced stop symbol information is set. Also, if the judgment result is not a small hit due to the winning to the starting port 2 (A3
If the result of 015 is "N"), that is, if the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, then stop symbol information is set (A3018). After that, the process proceeds to step A3019.

After steps A3012, A3017 and A3018, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area (A3019). The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the fluctuation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. Then, a low-probability look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3020), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3021).
).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead big hit determination in a high-probability state (A3022), and similarly to A3009-A3018, A3023-A3
032 is executed. First, the later-described look-ahead big hit determination process is executed (A3023),
It is determined whether or not the determination result of the look-ahead big hit determination process is a big hit (A3024). If the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3024 is "Y"), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch (starter 1 switch 36a or starter 2 switch 37a) is set (A3025). , the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3026), and the process proceeds to step A3033.

Game control device 100, when the determination result of the look-ahead big hit determination process is lost (A3
If the result of 024 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the winning is to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A3027). In the case of winning the starting port 2 (the result of A3027 is "Y"),
Since a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed by winning the starting port 2, a small hit determination process described later is executed as a look-ahead process related to the small hit (A3028),
It is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3029). Then, if the judgment result is a small hit (the result of A3029 is "Y"), a small hit pattern random number check table is set (A3030), and stop pattern information corresponding to the prepared small hit pattern random number is acquired ( A3031), and the process proceeds to step A3033.

When the game control device 100 is not winning to the starting port 2 (the result of A3027 is "N")
, Since a small hit cannot be generated in the special figure 1 variable display game, stop symbol information for losing is set (A3032). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the misplaced stop symbol information is set. Also, if the judgment result is not a small hit due to the winning to the starting port 2 (A3
If the result of 029 is "N"), that is, if the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, then stop symbol information is set (A3032). After that, the process proceeds to step A3033.

After steps A3026, A3031 and A3032, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (A3033). In the case of special high probability (A3033
result is "Y"), the stop pattern information is overwritten and saved in the pattern information area (A3034),
The process proceeds to step A3035. The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the fluctuation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. If it is not in the special high probability (A30
33 result is "N"), without overwriting the stop pattern information in the pattern information area, step A
3035 processing is started.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3035).
, effect command setting processing is executed (A3036).

Subsequently, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is executed (A3037), and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed as a look-ahead. (A3038). Then, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as a production command (A3039), execute the production command setting process (A3040), and perform the special figure reservation information determination process. finish.

In addition, the effect control device 300 receives both the prefetching stop symbol command (low probability) and the prefetching stop symbol command (high probability), but if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is a low probability state, the prefetching stop symbol command ( Low probability) is used to execute the look-ahead symbol system command processing (Fig. 51), and if the jackpot probability when received is in a high probability state, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is performed using the look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) (FIG. 51) may be performed.

[Look-ahead big hit determination process]
Next, look-ahead big hit determination processing (A3009, A3023
) will be described in detail. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the look-ahead big hit determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A3101), and judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3102). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

Game control device 100, when the target jackpot random number value is less than the lower limit judgment value (A310
The result of 2 is "Y"), set a failure (other than a big hit) as the determination result (A3107), and end the look-ahead big-hit determination process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A3
The result of 102 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (A3
103). Then, if the judgment flag is the high probability judgment flag (the result of A3103 is "Y"), the upper limit judgment value in high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3104). On the other hand, if the determination flag is not a high-probability determination flag (if it is a low-probability determination flag), (A3
103 result is "N"), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the set probability value (A3
105).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A3106). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3106 is "Y"), the judgment result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A3107). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3106 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A3108). When the determination result is set, the look-ahead big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

The game control device 100 first displays a special figure 1 indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted.
It is determined whether or not the game interruption flag is set (A3201).

When the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted is not set (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 wins the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is determined whether it is in the state or in the small hit state (A3202). If neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the result of A3202 is "N"),
A big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process,
The detection of game balls by the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Then, specific area switch specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (
subtract 1) (A3205). The special figure 1 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (the result of A3202 is "Y"), steps A3203 and A32
04 is skipped, and step A3205 is processed. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3217.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the game control device 100
The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the game process number is set in the register (A3207). Furthermore, the special figure 1 game sequence branch table is used to acquire the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3
208). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed by the special figure 1 game processing number, and the game branch processing is executed according to the special figure 1 game processing number (A3209).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A3209, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure 1 fluctuation Special figure 1 Normal processing is executed (A3210). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 usual processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A3209, the game control device 100
The setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 1 changing process for performing the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process are executed (A3211). In addition, the details of the processing during special figure 1 fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A3209, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot, the jackpot fanfare command is set according to the jackpot type, the fanfare time is set according to the jackpot opening pattern of each jackpot, and the fanfare/interval processing is performed. To perform the setting of the information necessary for performing special figure 1 display during processing is executed (A3212). In addition, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A3209, the game control device 100
A fanfare/interval process for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A3213). Details of the fanfare/during interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A3209, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, and the processing of setting the information necessary for the processing of the remaining balls of the big winning gate, etc. Open the big winning gate. Intermediate processing is executed (A3214).

If the game processing number is "5" at step A3209, the game control device 100
A process of setting the interval time and the ending time, and a big winning hole remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process are executed (A3215).

If the game processing number is "6" at step A3209, the game control device 100
A special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) is set, and special figure 1 jackpot end processing for setting information necessary for executing special figure 1 normal processing is executed (A3216). In addition, special figure 1
Details of the jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A3217), special figure 1 display The symbol variation control process related to the device 51 is executed (A3218), and the lever solenoid 86
Executes lever solenoid control processing for controlling b (A3219), and ends the special figure 1 game processing.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 performs step A32.
Special figure 1 for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 without performing the processing from 02 to A3216
After preparing the variation control table (A3217), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is performed (A3219), and the special figure 1 End game processing. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted, the timing (renewal) of the variation time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variation time is stopped. It should be noted that, in the special figure 1 display device 51, the special symbol variation itself may be seemingly continued by the symbol variation control process.

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing the first half and second half of the special figure 2 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is in the jackpot state (A3301). If it is not in the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A3301 is "N"), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the number of game balls at the lower big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 Monitor detections. Then, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (
subtract 1) (A3304). The special figure 2 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

When the game control device 100 is in the jackpot state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3301
result is "Y"), step A33 without performing steps A3302 and A3303
04 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3323.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the special figure 2
It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (A3306). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is "N"),
The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307), and the timer value for long fluctuations (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (
A3308). It should be noted that, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game is a long variation, and when the variation time is long (eg, 10 minutes), the timer for the variation time cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3306-A3308 By repeating the count of the timer value for long fluctuation by the processing of , a timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y") and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3306 is "Y") , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3309). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed by the special figure 2 game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special figure 2 game processing number (A3311).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A3311, the game control device 100
Monitor the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, set the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, set the effect, and set the information necessary for processing during the special figure 2 fluctuation Special figure 2 Normal processing is executed (A3312). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 usual processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A3311, the game control device 100
And the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, to perform the special figure 2 fluctuation during processing such as the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 2 display (A3313). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A3311, the game control device 100
If the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, the jackpot fanfare command is set according to the jackpot type, the fanfare time is set according to the jackpot opening pattern of each jackpot, and the fanfare/interval processing is performed. To perform special figure 2 display during processing to set the necessary information, etc. (A3314). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A3311, the game control device 100
Fanfare/interval processing for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of openings, and setting information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A3315). It should be noted that the fanfare/during-interval processing is common to that executed within the special-figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A3311, the game control device 100
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the processing of setting the ending command, and the processing of setting the information necessary for the processing of the remaining balls of the big winning gate, etc. Open the big winning gate. Intermediate processing is executed (A3316).

If the game processing number is "5" at step A3311, the game control device 100
A processing for setting the interval time and the ending time, and a big winning hole remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end processing are executed (A3317).

If the game processing number is "6" at step A3311, the game control device 100
Special figure 2 jackpot end processing for performing setting of information necessary for executing special figure 2 usual processing is executed (A3318). The details of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "7" at step A3311, the game control device 100
Small win fanfare mid-process for setting the opening time of the big winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, setting information necessary for performing the small-win mid-process, etc. is executed (A3319). Details of the process during the small winning fanfare will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 .

If the game processing number is "8" at step A3311, the game control device 100
A process of setting a small hit end command and a process of setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process are executed (A3320).

If the game processing number is "9" at step A3311, the game control device 100
Processing for setting the ending time and small hit remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end processing are executed (A3321).

When the game processing number is "10" at step A3311, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). In addition, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 46 .

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A3323), special figure 2 display The symbol variation control process related to the device 52 is executed (A3324), and the lever solenoid 86
Execute the lever solenoid control process for controlling b (A3325), and end the special figure 2 game process.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start to vary (A3401). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (if the fluctuation cannot be started) (the result of A3401 is "N"), set the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" as the special figure 1 game processing number (A3416), save to special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3417). In addition, here, from the end of the variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (during special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 2 jackpot end processing), and the special figure 2 variation display game From the end of the small hit variation (during the special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the small hit operation (special figure 2 small hit end processing), the special figure 1 variation display game cannot start the variation.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can start fluctuation (A3401
(A3402). If the left-handed instruction notification command is already prepared as a production command and transmitted to the production control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction has been notified. If left-handed instruction has been notified (A34
02 result is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3406.

If the game control device 100 has not already notified the left-handed instruction based on the left-handed instruction notification flag (the result of A3402 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and performs an effect command setting process. (A3404), and sets a left-handed instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 (A340
5).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3406)
. If the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (the result of A3406 is "Y"), save the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3402). Thereby, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reservations becomes 1 or more.

Game control device 100, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (the result of A3406 is "N"),
A variation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the time saving state is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3408). Subsequently, a special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). After that, the decoration special figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as a production command (A3410), and the production command setting process is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A34
12), the effect command setting process is executed (A3413). The production control device 300 that has received the remaining game number command can grasp the number of time reduction fluctuations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area in RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, in the special figure status area, during the special figure 1 fluctuation, or (during special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) information will be set. Next, execute the special figure 1 fluctuation process transition setting process, which is a process for transitioning to the special figure 1 fluctuation process (
A3415). In the special figure 1 variable process transition setting process, for example, the process number "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game can start to vary (A3501). If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not possible to start fluctuation (if the fluctuation cannot be started) (the result of A3501 is "N"), set the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), save in special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Here, from the end of the variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (during special figure 1 display processing) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 1 jackpot end processing), the special figure 2 variation display game is changed. Not startable.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start fluctuation (A3501
(A3502). If the number of special figures 2 pending is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), prepare the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the presence or absence of the time saving state as a production command (A3503), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3504). Next, special figure 2
Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display game is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3506), and executes production command setting processing ( A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A3508), and executes an effect command setting process. Yes (A3509
). The production control device 300 that has received the remaining game number command can grasp the number of time reduction fluctuations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area in RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, in the special figure status area, during the special figure 2 fluctuation, or (during special figure 1 fluctuation + special figure 2 fluctuation) information will be set. Next, execute the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process, which is a process for transitioning to the special figure 2 fluctuation process (
A3511). In the special figure 2 fluctuation processing transition setting process, for example, the processing number "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area.

Game control device 100, if the special figure 2 pending number is 0 (result of A3502 is "Y"),
It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (A3512). If the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (
The result of A3512 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (A3513). If Toku-zu 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A3513 is "N"
), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3514). If the customer waiting demonstration has not started (the result of A3514 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set (A3515).
.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516), and executes effect command setting processing (A3517).
The production control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demonstration command can execute the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41. - 特許庁After that, set the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" as the special figure 2 game processing number (A
3518), and save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Thereby, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (the result of A3512 is "N"), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed, so without preparing the customer waiting demo command, the special figure 2 Set the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" as the game processing number (A3518) and save it in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Also, if Toku-zu 1 is fluctuating (A35
13 is "Y"), or if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3514 is "Y")
”), without preparing a customer waiting demo command, etc., set the special figure 2 normal processing number “0” as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), and enter the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM Save (A3519).

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3409) in special figure 1 normal processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a).
In addition, the special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting the variation information (including the distribution of the prefetch variation pattern). Next, load a random number from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3602a), and clear the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for the number 1 of the reservations) to 0 (A3603a) , a falling lottery process, which will be described later, is executed (A3604a). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 performs big hit flag 1 setting processing (
A3605a), special figure 1 stop design setting process (A
3606a), the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3608a ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game, the variation start information setting process for setting the information of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game ( A3610a) is executed. Then, a time-reduction variation count update process for updating the time-reduction variation count is executed (A3
611a).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "1
” (A3612a), and save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A3
613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 1 (the ON data of the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3616a). Subsequently, save the initial value (e.g. 100 msec) of the flashing control timer (blinking period timer of the special figure 1 indicator 51) in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (A3617
a), save the initial value of the pattern number during fluctuation (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting pattern) in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (A3618a), and finish the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start process replaces the "jackpot flag 1" in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (Fig. 18) with the "jackpot flag 2" and the "special figure 1" with the "special figure 2". Since the same processing as the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed, detailed description is omitted. It should be noted that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process respectively correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Fall lottery process]
Next, the fall lottery process (A3604
a, A3604b) will be described in detail. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the falling lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a high probability state (variable probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3701). If it is not in the special figure high probability (the result of A3701 is "N"), the falling lottery process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is in the special figure high probability (the result of A3701 is "Y"), the falling lottery random number value of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is less than the falling lottery lower limit judgment value. (A3702). If the falling lottery lower limit judgment value is less than (the result of A3702 is "Y
”), and the drop lottery process ends. If it is equal to or greater than the drop lottery lower limit judgment value (the result of A3702 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the target drop lottery random number value is larger than the drop lottery upper limit judgment value (A3703). When it is larger than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (result of A3703 is "Y")
, ends the drop lottery process.

If the game control device 100 is below the falling lottery upper limit judgment value (the result of A3703 is "N"
), the target drop lottery random number is between the drop lottery upper limit judgment value and the drop lottery lower limit judgment value, so the process when winning the drop lottery is started. Save in the external information output data area (A3704). where the signal for high-probability termination is
They are OFF data (OFF signal) of 2 jackpot signals and OFF data (OFF signal) of 4 jackpot signals. As a result, a signal relating to high-probability termination is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and eventually to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A3705). Signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are, for example, off data of special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1
They are the OFF data of the fluctuation time reduction state signal and the OFF data of the special pattern 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the instruction to hit to the left in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area of RWM (A3707). Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM (A3708), and end the falling lottery process. The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low probability and there is no time saving state (normal game state).

As described above, in the variable state (special high probability), a drop lottery is executed at the start of each special variable display game, and when the drop lottery is won, the variable state (high probability state) is changed to the normal game state (low Falling process (A3704-A3708) for falling to probability state) is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the RWM jackpot flag 1 area (A3801). Subsequently, a jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A3802). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (A3803)
.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3804). jackpot flag 2
is not a big hit (the result of A3804 is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random value,
A big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A38
05), it is determined whether or not the result of determination is a big hit (A3806). If the result of determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3801 (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. Only when the big win flag 2 is not a big win, the big win flag 1 can become a big win (the big win information is saved in the big win flag 1 area), so that the big win flag 1 and the big win flag 2 can be prevented from becoming a big win at the same time. .

If the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "Y
”), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A3806 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area of RWM (
A3901), save information in the RWM jackpot flag 2 area (A3902).
Subsequently, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1),
Prepare (A3903). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3905). jackpot flag 1
is not a big hit (the result of A3905 is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random value,
A big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit is executed (A39
06), it is determined whether or not the result of determination is a big hit (A3907). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907 is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3902 (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is performed. finish. Only when the big win flag 1 is not a big win, the big win flag 2 can become a big win (the big win information is saved in the big win flag 2 area), so that the big win flag 1 and the big win flag 2 can be avoided from becoming a big win at the same time. .

If the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "Y
”), or if the determination result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907 is “N”), based on the acquired big hit random number value, whether the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit A small hit determination process for determining whether or not is executed (A3909), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (A3910). In addition, in this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the determination of the small hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). special figure 2
If the variable display game is a small hit (result of A3910 is "Y"), step A3901
Overwrite the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area that saved the losing information and save it (A
3911), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. When the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the big hit determination process in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (
A3805, A3906) will be described in detail. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. Incidentally, the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A4001), and judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A4002). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

Game control device 100, when the target jackpot random number value is less than the lower limit judgment value (A400
The result of 2 is "Y"), set a failure (other than a big hit) as the judgment result (A4007), and end the big hit judgment process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A4
The result of 002 is "N"), it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (A4003). And, when it is in the special figure high probability (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, if it is not in the special high probability (A
The result of 4003 is "N"), and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A
4005).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the jackpot random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (A4006). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), the decision result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A4007). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A4006 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit.

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In addition, in this embodiment,
Although the small hit random number is not provided uniquely and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit, it is also possible to provide the unique small hit random number.

Game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A
The result of 4101 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the determination result (A4103), and the small hit determination process is terminated.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value. is determined (A4102). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A
If the result of 4102 is "Y"), deviation is set as the determination result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is "N"), a small hit is set as the judgment result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is terminated.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
Figure 25 (a) (b) (c) is a special figure variation display game determined as a result of the above-described big hit determination process (Figure 23), small hit determination process (Figure 24) and drop lottery process (Figure 20) is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability.

In the example of FIG. 25(a), the jackpot probability in the high-probability state (high-probability state) is the probability setting value 1
6 (Settings 1 to 6) are the same. On the other hand, jackpot probability in low probability state (low probability state)
tends to increase as the probability set value increases (higher setting). In this manner, only one of the jackpot probability in the low-probability state and the jackpot probability in the high-probability state may be increased as the probability set value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 23 by the value range of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the lower limit decision value or the value range of the jackpot random number in addition to the upper limit decision value.

Also, with settings 1 and 2, with settings 3 and 4, or with settings 5 and 6, the probability of a big hit (
High probability state) and jackpot probability (low probability state) are the same. It should be noted that the jackpot probabilities may be different for all settings. Moreover, even if the jackpot probabilities are the same, the effect control device 300 can execute an effect corresponding to each probability set value (fluctuation effect setting process to be described later).

In the example of FIG. 25(b), the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state, and regardless of the probability set value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit judgment value and the small hit lower limit judgment value in FIG. 24 by the value range of the big hit random number. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure 1 variation display game, no small hit occurs (the small hit probability is zero). In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

In the example of FIG. 25(c), the probability of falling as the winning probability of the falling lottery is the set probability value (setting)
Regardless of whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, and regardless of whether it is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game or a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is constant (1/237) be. The fall probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the fall lottery upper limit judgment value and the fall lottery lower limit judgment value in FIG. 20 by the fall lottery random number value range.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3606a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4201). jackpot flag 1
is a big hit (result of A4201 is "Y"), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4202). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (A4203), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design save area of RWM (A4204). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A42
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, special figure 1 indicator 5
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped in 1) and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Then, the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (A4207). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and special figure 2 big hit end process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area of RWM (A4208), and the big win corresponding to the stop symbol number. Acquire the mouth opening information and save it in the special figure 1 big winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4209). After that, the process proceeds to step A4212. These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4201 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special figure 1 stop symbol withdrawal area (A4210
), and the lost stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4211). After that, the process proceeds to step A4212.

After steps A4209 and A4211, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decoration special figure 1 command as a performance command in a decoration special figure 1 command area (A4212). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4213). Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4214), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4215). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3606b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A4301). jackpot flag 2
is a big hit (result of A4301 is "Y"), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4302). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot design table is set (A4303), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design save area of RWM (A4304). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A43
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, special figure 2 indicator 5
This is for setting the symbols to be stopped in 2) and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4307). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and special figure 2 big hit end process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area of RWM (A4308), and the big win corresponding to the stop symbol number. Acquire the mouth opening information and save it in the RWM special figure 2 big winning mouth opening information area (A4309). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317. These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4301 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, if the small hit flag 2 area contains the small hit information. It is determined whether it has been saved (A4310). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4310 is "Y"), the small hit design random number is loaded from the special figure 2 small hit design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (A4311). Next, set the special figure 1 small hit pattern table (A
4312), acquire the stop design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number, and save it in the special figure 2 stop design save area (A4313). This process selects the type of specific result.
Subsequently, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4314). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4310 is "N
”), the stop design number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop design save area (A4315), and the loss stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (A4316). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317.

After steps A4309, A4314, and A4316, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decoration special figure 2 command as a production command in a decoration special figure 2 command area (A4317). ). By the above processing, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4318). The decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319), and clears the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4320). ), 0 clear (A4
321). After that, the special figure 2 stop design setting processing is ended.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning port 36, and the normal variable winning device 37 detects the game ball. A variable display game executing means for executing a special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Example of special jackpot pattern distribution]
FIG. 28 is a table exemplifying the allocation of the types of the special figures 1 and 2 variation display game jackpot (jackpot pattern distribution) controlled by the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process described above. is. It should be noted that the allocation of types of jackpots is common to each setting (each probability setting value).

FIG. 28 exemplifies a table that defines the types of big hits corresponding to the big hit stop design numbers acquired in the special figure 1 stop design setting process and the special figure 2 stop design setting process and the allocation rate thereof. In the example of FIG. 28, the types of jackpots are common to special figure 1 and 2 variable display games, 10R probability variable jackpot and 4R.
There are probability variable jackpots and 10R normal jackpots (time saving times 100 times). In addition, a 10R normal jackpot (time reduction number of times 0 times) may be provided.

In addition, the distribution rate of the 10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot (time saving number of times 100 times) is 30%, 30%, and 40% in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game They are different at 50%, 10% and 40%. Note that the allocation rate can be changed as appropriate.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the variation pattern selection information table (A4401
). Then, the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation. The first half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of reach,
The second half variation is a variation mode after reaching the reach state, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4403), and if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), To distribute the first half variation according to the number of special figure 1 reservations, add the number of special figure 1 reservations to the first half offset data and convert the value (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 (A4403
is "Y"), the process of step A4404 is not performed, and the first half offset data acquired in step A4402 is not updated or converted, and the process proceeds to step A4405.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of RWM (A4405), and saves the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2).
) is saved in the RWM fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting process is terminated.

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a low probability state and no time saving state (state without general electric support), that is, during special low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (A4501). If there is a special low probability & no time saving (A
If the result of 4501 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4505.

If the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & short working hours (the result of A4501 is "N
”), that is, when it is in the time saving state or the definite variable state, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started from now is the time shortening final variation (A4502). The time reduction final variation is the final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in the time saving state. When the special figure variation display game to be started from now on is the time shortening final variation (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4506.

The game control device 100 sets a variation pattern selection information table (A
4503). Then, the first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation. .

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game to be started from now on is a high probability final fluctuation when the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (the result of A4501 is "Y"). (A4505). Here, the high-probability final variation is a special figure variation display game when the drop lottery (FIG. 20) is won and the probability variation state (high-probability state) falls to the normal game state (low-probability state).

The game control device 100, when the special figure variation display game to be started from now on is a high probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "Y"), or when it is a time reduction final variation (A450
2 result is "Y"), in order to secure the time for notifying that it is the final variation, set the first half offset data and second half offset data for the final variation (A4506), and shift to the processing of step A4511. .

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit when the special figure variation display game to be started is not the high probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "N"). A4507). If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (A450
The result of 7 is "N"), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4508), and the process moves to step A4510. When the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at the time of low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the second half offset data for long-time variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A4510). Thereby, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a long fluctuation (long fluctuation).

In addition, in the probability variable state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, the second half offset data for the long-term variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is not set, so the special figure 2 variation display game is the normal variation time variation ( short fluctuations compared to long fluctuations). As a result, in the probability variable state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which a small hit frequently occurs due to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is possible.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of RWM (A451
1) Save the second half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 2) in the RWM fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4512), and end the special figure 2 information setting process.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3609a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the variable group address table (A4601a
), acquire and prepare the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 (
A4602a), load the variation pattern random number 1 as a random number from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4603a).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a loss (A4604a). If the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is lost (A4604
The result of a is "Y"), and 2-byte allocation processing based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4
605a), when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a loss (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604a is "N"), a sorting process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606a). In addition, the 2-byte distribution process and the distribution process are processes for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The structure of the second-half variation group table is different for winning and for losing. The size of the random number for distribution is 1 byte for winning and 2 bytes for losing. The size of the hit is set to 1 byte in order to save the data capacity, but since the appearance rate of the hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, even 1 byte is sufficient. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big win or a small win), only the lower value of the variation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605a or A4606a, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the allocation (A4607a). Subsequently, load the variation pattern random number 2 as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608a), and execute the sorting process based on the variation pattern random number 2 (A4609a) . Then, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (A4610a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the second half variation number (second half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4611a),
A table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation allocation information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612a)
. Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4613a). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of special figure 1 is prepared by loading the fluctuation pattern random number 3 as a random number (A4614a), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615a). The distribution process here is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, and is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation number (first half fluctuation pattern) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group). be.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of being distributed,
Save in the first half variation number area (A4616a), and end the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (A3609b) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. Figure 32 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing.

The special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is the same as the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, in which "special figure 1" in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (Fig. 31) is replaced with "special figure 2". is performed, detailed description is omitted. Incidentally, steps A4601b-A4616b in the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process respectively correspond to steps A4601a-A4616a in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting process (A3
610a, A3610b) will be described in detail. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 used (A5001).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation time value table (A5002), and acquires the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number (A5003). Furthermore, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (
A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A500
6), save the added value in the target special game processing timer area (A5007). continue,
It is determined whether or not information is being set regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A5008). If the information is not set for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (result of A5008 is "N"), special figure 2
Since the information is being set for the variable display game, it is determined whether or not to start the long variation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5009).

If the game control device 100 does not start the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (A5009
result is "N"), save 0 in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A50
10), when starting the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5009 is "Y"),
9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5011). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variable display game, in order to change the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not enough with a 2-byte timer, the predetermined number of repetitions (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to the number of repetitions. set in the area. In timer interrupt processing with an interrupt period of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, 60000 ms by saving the above additional value to the special game processing timer area
If a timer of ec (60 seconds) is set and a further 9 iterations are saved,
Timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2 game processing (Fig. 15)) continues to subtract the timer (A3
304), when the time is up (result of A3305 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3307), and 60000 ms (60 seconds), which is the long fluctuation timer value, is set again in the game processing timer (A3308). ). As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game of long variation,
60000 msec + (60000 msec x 9) = 10 minutes long variation time.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when it is not a long fluctuation (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007 It is the sum of the time value and the second half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variation display game (A50
08 result is "Y"), step A5012 without setting the number of repetitions of the timer
transition to

After steps A5008, A5010 and A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012) and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). . Then, an effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) of the special figure fluctuation display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and the target special figure fluctuation Shift the contents of the random number storage area related to the display game (A5016), and clear the empty area after the shift (
A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Variation commands including information about patterns are mentioned, and these commands are sent to the production control device 300 . In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing for updating the number of time reduction fluctuations]
Next, the details of the time reduction variation count update process (A3611a, A3611b) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the time reduction variation count update process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether it is in the special figure high probability (during the variable probability state) (
A5101). When a special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, a special figure high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress.
When it is in the special figure high probability (the result of A5101 is "Y"), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

If the game control device 100 is not in the special figure high probability (the result of A5101 is "N"), it determines whether it is in the special figure time saving (during the time saving state) (A5102). If there is a time saving flag (in this embodiment, a special figure low probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that it is in a special figure time saving. If it is not in the special figure time saving (the result of A5102 is "N"), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

If the game control device 100 is in the special figure time saving (a state with a special figure low probability and a general electric support) (the result of A5102 is "Y"), the time shortening fluctuation frequency is updated by -1 (subtracts only 1 )
(A5103). In addition, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the time saving state is maintained after the end of the jackpot, and is set to 100 times, for example (jackpot end setting process 2 described later).
. Also, even if any of the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game starts to fluctuate, the time reduction variation frequency is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A5
104). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5104 is "N"), that is,
When the time saving state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 ends the time shortening variation count update process. When the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A5104
result is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of time saving in the external information output data area (A5105). Here, the signal related to the time saving end is off data of the big hit 2 signal. As a result, the signal related to the time saving end is transmitted to the external information terminal 71 as external information.
As a result, it is output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of time saving in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5106). The signal related to the time saving end here is, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal,
OFF data of normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, OFF data of normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A
5107), save the special low probability & no time saving flag in the special game mode flag area of RWM (A5108), save the general no time saving flag in the general game mode flag area (A
5109), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the time reduction variation number update process in the second embodiment, appropriately normal game state (special figure low probability and ordinary state without power support).

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuating process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 during fluctuation processing.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of output times of symbol determination by +1 (A5301).
The output count of the number of design confirmations is used in the design confirmation number signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) that outputs the pattern confirmation number signal generated when the stop pattern of the special symbol variation display game is decided to the external device. be done. Next, the decoration special figure 1 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared as a production command (A5302), and the production command setting process is executed (A5
303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5
305).

Next, the game control device 100, as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1,
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 is set (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is the missing symbol of special figure 1.
00msec, if it is a big hit pattern of special figure 1, it is 2000msec.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a loss (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is lost (the result of A5307 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is changed to the special figure 1 stop symbol Load from the save area and save in the special figure 1 stop pattern area (A5
322).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a win (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is "N"), the game control device 100 also changes the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed).
(A5308). If special figure 2 is not fluctuating (the result of A5308 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5319. If special figure 2 is also changing (A53
(A5
309).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5309 is "
Y"), and the process proceeds to step A5311. If the special figure 2 display process is not running (
The result of A5309 is "N"), and the design determination number output number is updated by +1 (A5310). Subsequently, the display time of the special figure 1 plus 4msec to the special figure 1 display time (special figure 1 display time + 4msec) is set (A5311), and the special figure 2 is displayed in the game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason for adding 4msec is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game process (subtraction of 4msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) (A3304), which is an extra addition. Thereby, the actual display time of the stop pattern of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop pattern of the special figure 2 can be made the same. In addition, if you have already started the stop display of special figure 2, the display time will be reset here (basically the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the missing pattern command of the decoration special figure 2 as a production command (A5313), saves it in the decoration special figure 2 command area (A5314), and executes the production command setting process ( A5315). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5317). After that, special figure 2 displaying processing transition setting processing 2 which makes the setting in order to execute the special figure 2 displaying processing is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, save the process number "2" in the special figure 2 game process number area,
Execute processing to stop the special figure 2 fluctuation display game with the result of losing.

By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, in the special figure 1 fluctuation processing which is the control related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is set. , Execution of special figure 2 display processing (end of special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (during the special figure 2 variation), if the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a hit result (jackpot), the special figure 2 variation display game is lost. As a result, the process is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

It should be noted that the special figure 1 variable processing, at the end of the fluctuation time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) times up (of A3206 Since the result is "Y"), when the special figure 1 variation display game of the winning result stops variation, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 1 command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saves it in the winning design command area (A5319). Next, load the round number upper limit information from the above-mentioned special figure 1 round number upper limit information area, save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5320), The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 display during processing transition setting processing 1 which sets for executing the special figure 1 display processing is executed (A5323), and the special figure 1 changing processing is ended. In special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1, special figure 1 is being displayed, such as saving the processing number "2" in the special figure 1 game processing number area, executing processing to stop the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, etc. Perform necessary processing to move to processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variation display game (while the special figure 2 is varying)
Even so, when the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a winning result, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly terminated with a losing result.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. Figure 36 is the flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation.

The game control device 100 first updates the number of output times of design determination by +1 (A5401).
The output count of the number of times of design determination is used in the design determination number signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) for outputting to an external device the pattern determination number signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined. . Next, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepared as a production command (A5402), and the production command setting process is executed (A540
3). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and an effect command setting process is executed (A540
5).

Next, the game control device 100, as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2,
Set the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is a missing symbol of the special figure 2.
00 msec, 600 msec if the special figure 2 big hit pattern, 136 msec if the special figure 2 small hit pattern. In addition, the display time of the winning pattern and the big hit pattern of the special figure 2 is the same, but is longer than the display time of the small hit pattern of the special figure 2. - 特許庁

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a loss (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is lost (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop design setting process (stop design number at the time of loss) is changed to the special figure 2 stop design Load from the save area and save in the special figure 2 stop pattern area (A5
427).

If the game control device 100 does not lose the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A5407
The result is "N"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is also fluctuating (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is also being executed) (A5408). If special figure 1 is not fluctuating (the result of A5408 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5423. If Toku-zu 1 is also fluctuating (the result of A5408 is "Y
”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (A5409).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit, the game control device 100 (A540
If the result of 9 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit, set the special figure 1 game interruption flag (
A5412), prepares the decoration special figure 1 interruption command as an effect command (A5413), and executes the effect command setting process (A5414). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (during the special figure 1 variation), when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a small hit, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the special figure 1 game. Interruption is achieved by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (display of the stop pattern corresponding to the stop pattern number) is postponed, and after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is completed, the special figure 1 that was interrupted You can restart the variable display game.

The game control device 100 (A540
The result of 9 is "Y"), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 display processing described later is being executed (A54
10). If the special figure 1 displaying process is in progress (result of A5410 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A5415. If the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5410 is "N"), +1 is updated to the design fixed number of times output number (A5411). Subsequently, the value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 2 as the display time of special figure 1 (display time of special figure 2 + 4 msec
Set the display time of c) (A5415) and save the display time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5416). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason for adding 4 msec is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game process (subtracts only 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) (A3205
), which is an extra addition. Thereby, the display time of the stop design of the actual special figure 2 and the display time of the stop design of the special figure 1 can be made the same. In addition, if you have already started the stop display of special figure 1, the display time will be reset here (basically the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the winning pattern command of the decoration special figure 1 as a production command (A5417), saves it in the decoration special figure 1 command area (A5418), and executes the production command setting process ( A5419). Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5421). After that, special figure 1 displaying during processing shift setting processing 2 which makes the setting in order to execute processing during special figure 1 displaying is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, save the process number "2" in the special figure 1 game process number area,
A process of stopping the special figure 1 fluctuation display game with the result of losing is executed.

By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, in the special figure 2 fluctuation process which is the control related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (including the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is set. , Execution of special figure 1 display processing (end of special figure 1 fluctuation display game)
is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variation display game is in progress (during the special figure 1 variation), if the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variation display game is forced as a result of losing. will end (execution ends).

It should be noted that the special figure 2 fluctuation process, when the fluctuation time ends, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3305 and A3306 is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 2 variation display game of the hit result stops variation, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly ended in variation (execution end).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special figure 2 command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saves it in the winning design command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (A5424). If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern setting process (stop pattern number at the time of a small hit) is saved in the special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the result of A5424 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5425),
The special prize opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5426). After that, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, execute the special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1 to set for executing the special figure 2 display processing (A5428), and end the special figure 2 fluctuation processing. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, the process number "2" is entered in the special figure 2 game process number area
Or save, such as executing the processing to stop the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, perform the necessary processing to shift to the special figure 2 display processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variation display game (during special figure 1 variation)
Even so, when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly terminated with a losing result.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3212) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 displaying process.

The game control device 100, first, from the jackpot flag 1 area to the jackpot flag 1 (jackpot information,
Or, showing the loss information) is loaded (A5701), and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (A5702). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5703).

If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 (A5703
result is "Y"), the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5704). For example, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 jackpot is the ON data of the condition device operating signal and the ON data of the special symbol 1 per signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5705), and executes the effect command setting process (A57
06). In addition, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this winning design command corresponds to a big winning design. Subsequently, a big hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability in the external information output data area (A5709). The signals here include the ON data (ON signal) of two jackpot signals and the ON data (ON signal) of three jackpot signals. In this embodiment, there is no 2R jackpot, so it is irrelevant. However, the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off with a low probability 2R variable jackpot, and the jackpot 3 signal may be turned off with a high probability 2R variable jackpot. You may

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big prize opening opening information (A5710), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the processing number to shift to fanfare/interval processing (A5712), saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5713), / Executes interval processing transition setting processing (
A5714), end the processing during special figure 1 display.

In the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing, processing for shifting to the fanfare/interval processing is executed. Specifically, as signals relating to the start of the jackpot, the ON data (ON signal) of the jackpot 1 signal and the ON data (ON signal) of the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. In addition, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area, and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Furthermore, the time reduction variation count region for holding the time reduction variation count is cleared. Also, the round number area is cleared to 0.

On the other hand, if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A5703 is "N"), that is, if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is If it is lost, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5715). The high-probability final variation is a special figure variation display game when winning the falling lottery (FIG. 20). If it is not a high probability final variation (the result of A5715 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a time reduction final variation (A5716). The time reduction final variation is the final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in the time saving state. If not time shortened final variation (result of A5716 is 'N'),
The process proceeds to step A5724.

If the game control device 100 is a high probability final variation (the result of A5715 is "Y") or a time reduction final variation (the result of A5716 is "Y"), a probability information command indicating a low probability (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5717), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5718). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5719), and the left hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (A5720).
After that, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A5721). If it is a small hit state of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (result of A5721 is "Y"), step A5
724 processing is started.

If the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5721 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5
722). Subsequently, the second game state display section 56 (lamp D8
-D10), save the number in the left-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5723), and clear the special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5
724). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a loss, set "0" as the processing number of the special figure 1 normal process in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal process, and enter the special figure 1 game processing number area Save the processing number (A5725). Then, the processing during special figure 1 display is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3314) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. Figures 38A and 38B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the process during special figure 2 display. Figure 38A shows the first half of the process during special figure 2 display, Figure 38B shows the second half of the process during special figure 2 display.

The game control device 100, first, from the small hit flag 2 area small hit flag 2 (small hit information,
Or, showing the loss information) is loaded (A5801), and the small hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5802). Subsequently, from the jackpot flag 2 area to the jackpot flag 2 (jackpot information, or
(A5803) and clear the jackpot flag 2 area (A5
804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 (A5805
result is "Y"), the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5806). For example, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is the ON data of the condition device operating signal and the ON data of the special symbol 2 winning signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the winning symbol command from the winning symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5807), and executes the effect command setting process (A58
08). In addition, since the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big win, this winning design command corresponds to a big winning design. Subsequently, a big hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5809), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5810).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability in the external information output data area (A5811). The signals here include ON data of two jackpot signals and ON data of three jackpot signals. In this embodiment, there is no 2R jackpot, so it is irrelevant. However, the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off with a low probability 2R variable jackpot, and the jackpot 3 signal may be turned off with a high probability 2R variable jackpot. You may

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (A5812), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5813). Then, "3" is set as the processing number to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A5814).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5
815), execute fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (A5816),
End the special figure 2 displaying process. The fanfare/interval process transition setting process is the same as that executed within the special figure 1 display process.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a big hit (A5
The result of 805 is "N"), based on the small hit flag 2, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) ( A5817). If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A5817 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5818). If it is not a high probability final variation (the result of A5818 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the time reduction final variation (A5819). If it is not the time reduction final change (the result of A5819 is "N"), the process of steps A5820 to A5823 is skipped and the process proceeds to step A5824.

If the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (the result of A5818 is "Y"), or if it is the time reduction final variation (the result of A5819 is "Y '), a probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is prepared as an effect command (A5820), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5821).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the RWM power failure restoration transmission command area (A5822), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A58
23). Thereafter, the winning symbol command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5824), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5825). note that,
Since the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, this hit design command corresponds to a small hit design.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small winning fanfare command as an effect command (A5826), and executes effect command setting processing (A5827). Then, the signal related to the instruction to hit to the right (the ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5828), and the second game state display section 56 (lamp D
8-D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5829).

Next, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 opens the lower big winning opening with a small hit,
Clear the lower big winning mouth fraudulent winning number area (A5830), save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the lower big winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (A5831), and execute special figure 2 small winning fanfare middle process transition setting process (A5832), and ends the special figure 2 display process. It should be noted that although a small win opens the big winning slot, the screen of the display device 41 does not have to be changed.

In the special figure 2 small winning fanfare mid-process transition setting process, a process for transitioning to the special figure 2 small winning fanfare mid-process is executed. Specifically, "7" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the small winning fanfare processing, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. In addition, the small win fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, and the signal regarding the start of the small win (ON data of the big win 1 signal) is saved in the external information output data area. Furthermore, a signal (ON data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area, and information during the small hit is saved in the special figure status area.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a small hit (if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5817 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game If the result of is lost, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the high probability final variation (A5833). If it is not a high probability final variation (the result of A5833 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time reduction final variation (A5834). If it is not the time reduction final variation (the result of A5834 is "N"), the processing of steps A5835 to A5839 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to step A5840.

If the game control device 100 is a high probability final variation (the result of A5833 is "Y"), or if it is a time reduction final variation (the result of A5834 is "Y"), the probability information command (
low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5835), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5836). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5837), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the second game state display section 5 for notifying that it is a right-hand shot.
In order to turn off 6 (lamps D8-D10), save the number in the left-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (A5839), and clear the special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5840). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost, set "0" as the processing number of the special figure 2 normal process in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal process,
The process number is saved in the game process number area (A5841). Then, the processing during the special figure 2 display is terminated.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. 39A and 39B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the fanfare/during-interval process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is 0 (A6001). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6001 is "N"), end the fanfare/interval process.
When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is "Y"). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first jackpot round (A600
2 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A6010.

If the game control device 100 is the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is "Y
”), it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (A6003). When there is no passage of the game ball at the normal pattern starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. That is, the right-hand shot is started and the normal figure start gate 34
Until the game ball passes through the game ball, it does not shift to the processing related to the big hit (such as processing during the opening of the big winning opening).

The game control device 100 (A600
If the result of 3 is "Y"), that is, when the right hand is started, the setting of information regarding the start of the big win is executed (A6004-A6009). First, set the round number limit table (
A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit information area is obtained from the round number upper limit table and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (A6005). In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds is 10R and 4R.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit information area from the round number upper limit table and saves it in the RWM round LED pointer area (A6006). Then, in this embodiment, since the upper big prize opening is opened in the big hit, the upper big prize opening fraudulent prize number area is cleared (A6007), R
Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area of WM (A600
8), save the ON output data of the continuous operation device operating signal in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A601
0). In addition, the number of rounds in the number of rounds area is cleared to 0 in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process, so it is set to 0 before the start of this big hit operation.
Thereafter, a round command corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6011), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets an initial value of the big-hit processing control pointer corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves it in the big-hit processing control pointer area of RWM (A6014). Here, in the case of a pattern that repeats the opening and closing of the big winning opening during one round, set 0 as the initial value, and in the case of the pattern of opening the big winning opening only once during one round, the initial value is the upper limit. Set a value (=21). In the case of a pattern that repeatedly opens and closes, the initial value may not be 0, but may be a value greater than 0 and less than the upper limit (that is,
start with a value in the middle). Next, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (A6015).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round for operating the lever solenoid 86b for opening the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A60
16). In this embodiment, the lever solenoid actuation round is jackpot round 1 (first jackpot round).

The game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b when it is the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "Y") (A6017). Here, in the case of a variable probability big hit (10R or 4R variable probability big hit), the lever solenoid is opened in a short time (very short time) in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot) for a short time (very short time). Set the operation data of 86b. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to 0. On the other hand, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "N"), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "
4” is set (A6019), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (
A6020). If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (the result of A6020 is "Y")
, This process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6021), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (A6022). If the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6020 is "N"), save this processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the special figure 2 game processing timer for the special figure 2 game processing time Save to area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal (ON data of the special electric accessory 1 in operation signal) related to the opening of the upper big winning opening in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the RWM big winning opening solenoid. In the data area, save the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) ON data (A6026), clear the large winning opening count (A6027), fanfare/interval processing exit.

In the present embodiment, there is only a big win that opens only the upper big prize opening, but two types of big wins that open only the upper big prize opening and big wins that only open the lower big prize opening may be provided.
A configuration is also possible in which a big win is provided in which both the upper big prize opening and the lower big prize opening are opened.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3216) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100 first executes a subroutine call based on time reduction determination data (A6101). When the time reduction determination data is data without time reduction, a jackpot end setting process 1 is executed (A6102) in order to shift to the normal game state after the end of the big win, and when the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction, the jackpot is won. In order to shift to the time saving state after the end, the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6104). In addition, as described above, in the case of the probability variable jackpot (10R or 4R probability variable jackpot), in the jackpot round 1 (first jackpot round), the specific area 86 is opened for a long time (A6017), and the specific area switch 72 is the specific area Passage of the game ball to 86 (V winning) is almost certainly detected (specific area regular passage). Then, when there is a detection signal from the specific area switch 72, the game control device 100 sends the specific area passing information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning).
can be stored in M.

In addition, even in jackpot round 1 in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot), the specific area 86
is opened for a very short period of time, but the specific area switch 72 may be able to detect accidental passage (V winning) of a game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (specific area irregular passage).
Also in this case, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information in the RAM.

Game control device 100, when there is no specific area passing information (result of A6104 is "N")
, the process proceeds to step A6106. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (A61
The result of 04 is "Y"), in order to shift to the variable probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the big win, the big win end setting process 3 is executed (A6105). In this case, the data set in the jackpot end setting process 3 is overwritten on the data set in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2, and the data set in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2 are invalidated. Become.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the probability information command from the power failure restoration transmission command area (A6106). In addition, in the jackpot end setting process 1-3, a probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a low probability or high probability probability state or a time saving state is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a specific area irregular passage (A6107). As described above, specific area irregular passage (specific area abnormal passage)
The game ball passes through the specific area 86 in the case of a normal jackpot, and the regular passage of the specific area (normal passage of the specific area) means the game ball passes through the specific area 86 in the case of a variable probability big hit. . For example, if specific area passing information is generated in the case of a normal jackpot, it can be determined that there has been a specific area irregular passing. It should be noted that, not only the specific area regular passage, even if there is a specific area irregular passage, after the big hit is completed, it shifts to the probability change state (probability change state).

The game control device 100, when there is a specific area irregular passage (result of A6107 is "Y"), includes irregular probability information in addition to the loaded probability information command (A6108), this probability information A production command setting process is executed to set the command as a production command (A6109). On the other hand, when there is no specific area irregular passage (the result of A6107 is "N"), effect command setting processing is executed to set the loaded probability information command as it is as the effect command (A6109).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A6110), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6111).
. Then, the signal related to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (A611
2). The signals relating to the end of the big win here are the off data of the big win 1 signal and the off data of the big win 3 signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6113). Signals relating to the end of the jackpot here are, for example, OFF data of the conditional device operating signal, OFF data of the continuous action device operating signal, OFF data of the special symbol 1 winning signal, and OFF data of the special symbol 2 winning signal. is.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A6114). Subsequently, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6115), and the special figure status area is cleared (A6116). After that, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6117), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

This special figure 2 game wait time value determines the start of fluctuation of the forcibly terminated special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing), and the next timer interrupt process (Fig. 7) It is set to delay time. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec which is twice the time of the interrupt cycle (ie, 2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

Assuming that the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, special figure 2 game processing ( A1314 in FIG. 7), the determination of the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts (starting in this timer interrupt process), so the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from the special figure 1 fluctuation display game It may start earlier and cause problems. In addition, since the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it remains at 0. Therefore, regarding the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the next timer interrupt process (special figure 1
It is performed in special figure 1 normal processing) during game processing.

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice the interrupt period (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starting within the timer interrupt process of this time ) This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt process, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further-
1 update (decrease of 4 msec) to 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), determination of the start of variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) is performed . As a result, in the next timer interrupt processing after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variation display game, the determination of the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing) is performed, and if the starting condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can start varying at the same time. In addition, as described above, while the special figure 1 variation display game is in the jackpot state, the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped with a lost pattern (forcibly terminated or originally not changed).

In addition, after the end of the jackpot state, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, if there is no particular problem in game control, the processing of step A6717 is omitted, and the special It is not necessary to set the FIG. 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3318) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot ending process.

Steps A6201 to A6216 of special figure 2 jackpot end processing are those in which "special figure 1" in steps A6101 to A6116 of special figure 1 jackpot end process is replaced with "special figure 2", respectively, special figure 1 jackpot end Since the same processing as steps A6101 to A6116 of the processing is performed, detailed description is omitted.

It should be noted that there is no need to set the special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0, and in the next timer interrupt process, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game start to fluctuate. Judgment (within special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing) is performed, and if the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game start fluctuation at the same time because it can

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
Next, jackpot end setting processing 1 (A6102, A62
02) will be described in detail. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of no time saving state (no time saving) in the external information output data area (A6301). Here, the signal related to the start without the time saving state is off data of the big hit 2 signal. A signal relating to the start of no time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302). Here, the signal related to the start without the time saving state is the off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the off data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, the special symbol 2 variation OFF data of the time shortening state signal, OFF data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and OFF data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without time saving state in the game state display number area (A6303), saves the no time saving flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6
304), save the special low probability & no time saving flag in the special game mode flag area (A
6305). Normal figure time saving no flag indicates that it is not a time reduction variation state (time saving state, general electricity support state) of the normal figure fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low probability and it is not a time saving state (universal electric support state).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction variation count area to 0 (A6306),
A signal (for example, OFF data of the firing position designation signal 1) relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A6307). Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), save the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), A probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is saved (A6309), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
Next, jackpot end setting processing 2 (A6103, A62
03) will be described in detail. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second jackpot end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of time saving in the external information output data area (A6501). Here, the signal related to the start of the time saving is the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal. The on-data of the two jackpot signals is saved in the external information output data area (A5709, A5811) at the start of the jackpot fanfare, and the on-data of the two jackpot signals continues from the middle of the jackpot to the external information terminal 71. As a result, it is output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the time saving state (there is time saving) in the test signal output data area (A6502). Here, the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is OFF data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, OFF data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, ON data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation ON data of the time reduction state signal, ON data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and ON data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number indicating that there is a time saving state in the game state display number area (A6503), and saves the flag indicating that there is a time saving state in the general game mode flag area (A
6504), Save the special low probability & time saving flag in the special game mode flag area (
A6505). There is a normal figure time saving flag indicates that it is a time reduction variation state (time saving state, general electricity support state) of the normal figure fluctuation display game. The special low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and the time saving state (universal electric support state).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction variation frequency area for storing the time reduction variation frequency (A6506), and the probability indicating that it is in the time reduction state in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery. The information command (time saving) is saved (A6507), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

Since it is a right-handed state in which a right-handed hit is more advantageous than a big-hit state, the right-handed hit is not set in the big-hit end setting process 2. - 特許庁

[Jackpot end setting process 3]
Next, jackpot end setting processing 3 (A6105, A62
05) will be described in detail. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the third jackpot end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of time saving in the external information output data area (A6801). Here, the signal related to the start of the time saving is the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal. The on-data of the two jackpot signals is saved in the external information output data area (A5709, A5811) at the start of the jackpot fanfare, and the on-data of the two jackpot signals continues from the middle of the jackpot to the external information terminal 71. As a result, it is output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of high probability & short working hours in the test signal output data area (A6802). Here, the signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving is the ON data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the ON data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the ON data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, the special symbol 2 This is the ON data of the fluctuation time reduction state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6803), and saves the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6804). The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is high and the time saving state (here, the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game is executed).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal (for example, the ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) regarding the instruction to hit to the right in the test signal output data area (A6805). Then, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), save the right-handed number in the game state display number 2 area (A6806), and save it in the power failure recovery transmission command area. A probability information command (high probability) indicating a high probability is saved (A6807), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated.

[Processing during small win fanfare]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process (A3319) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during the small winning fanfare.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening command for opening the lower special winning opening as a production command (A6901), and executes production command setting processing (A6902). next,
Set "8" as the processing number (A6903), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6904), and set the small hit opening time as the opening time of the lower big winning opening (for example, 1600
msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the small winning operation (ON data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (A6906), and saves it in the big winning opening solenoid output data area. The data on the lower prize winning slot is saved (A6907). As a result, the lower big winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened in the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 activates the count switch for the large winning opening (lower large winning opening switch 38
a and/or the upper big winning opening switch 39a) clear (A6908) the big winning opening count number area for storing the count number (the number of times of detection), and finish the processing during the small winning fanfare.

In the present embodiment, only the small winning opening pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once is used, but there may be a small winning opening pattern in which the opening and closing of the big winning opening are repeated. In addition, "8
”, it is possible to shift to the process during the small hit after the end of the process during the small hit fanfare.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3322) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit ending process.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 2 normal processing (
A7301), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the small win (off data of the special symbol 2 small win signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7304). In addition, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A7305), clear the special figure status area (A7306).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a low probability state and in a state of no time reduction (state without general electric support), that is, in a special low probability & no time reduction (normal (A7307). In the case of no special figure low probability & time saving (normal game state) (result of A7307 is "N"), the processing after step A7310 is executed.

When the game control device 100 is in a special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (A
The result of 7307 is "Y"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7308), and the left-handed number is displayed in the game state display number 2 area. is saved (A7309), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (A7310).

Game control device 100, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being interrupted (the result of A7310 is "Y"), prepares the decoration special figure 1 resume command as an effect command (A7311), and executes the effect command setting process. (A7312). The effect control device 300 that receives the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the processing of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, special figure 1
Clear the game interruption flag area (A7313), and end the special figure 2 small hit end processing. If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (the result of A7310 is "N"), clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area without preparing the decoration special figure 1 resume command (A7313),
End the special figure 2 small hit end processing

In addition, for the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 41), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit end process.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. Figure 47
2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003), and allow interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
00, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command sent from 00.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0
008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
to see if it's working properly. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 uses an RTC (real time clock) 3 as a timekeeping means.
38 is executed to read time information (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. In addition, when power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003 and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once when the power is turned on. The time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338 when the information is read. And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 replaces with RTC338, and may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any one of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, . . . ), a predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from this time interval by drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time at a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, a lottery may be made so that the selection rate for a long time interval decreases as the set value increases. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing lots for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, a lottery may be made so that the selection rate for a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and sound volume by the person in charge of the game hall (game parlor) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, production points are added when the production or operation to which the production points are to be added is executed. For example, information including performance point information is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process. By drawing lots for the value (additional value) to be added to the performance points with a probability corresponding to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from the added value. For example, lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of a large additional value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) composed of LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling effect devices (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as electric accessories driven by motors and solenoids (B002
1). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0021. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the value for the number of commands received (B1103
), and copy the contents of the receive command buffer in the RAM to the command area for analysis (B11
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer holds 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y
]), loads the contents of the received command in the command area for analysis (B1107), and executes received command analysis processing for analyzing the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 48) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of received command analysis processing executed by .0.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). Commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, MODE section (MODE command) and A
It consists of a CTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are M
It consists of an ODE section and an ACTION section in that order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B12
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
(B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). It should be noted that the variation system command is a command for commanding the variation pattern of the decorative special design, there is a variation command (set in the variation start information setting process). and MODE
If the part represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a variable command (B12
(B
1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command to command the operation related to the performance during the hit (display of the fanfare screen and the round screen, etc.). (Set during interval processing), Interval command (Set during processing during opening of large winning mouth), Ending command (Set during processing during opening of large winning mouth), Small win fanfare command, Small winning open command (Small winning round command), Small hit end screen command (small hit ending command) and the like. If the MODE part indicates a winning command (the result in B1207 is "Y"), the winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent a hit system command (B12
(B
1209). It should be noted that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special figure 1 command and a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. And when the MODE part represents a pattern-based command (
The result of B1209 is "Y"), the pattern-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the pattern system command (B12
09 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B
1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 (B12
11 result is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol system command includes a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), a look-ahead symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process ends. In addition, if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a low probability state, the prediction stop pattern command (low probability) is used to execute the prediction pattern system command processing, and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a high probability state, read ahead The stop symbol command (low probability) may be used to execute the look-ahead symbol system command process.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variation command (B1215). A look-ahead variation command includes a look-ahead variation pattern command. Then, if the MODE part indicates a read-ahead variation command (the result of B1215 is "
Y"), execute the prefetch variation command process (B1216), and terminate the received command analysis process.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the AC for the MODE part
Even if the TION part is not a correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 (B1
If the result of 301 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (B1303). And if the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization (
If the result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the one-shot command processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command (B1305 ). Then, when the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (B13
05 result is "Y"), the power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the power failure recovery command, the effect control device 300 (B1
If the result of 305 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, if the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (B130
7 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command process is terminated.

If the MODE part does not indicate the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), then it is determined whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). Then, if the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), execute the special figure 1 reservation information setting process (B1310),
Ends single-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of decoration special figure 2 reservation command (B1311). Then, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131
2) End the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command, the effect control device 300 (B1
The result of 313 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (B1315). Error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud occurrence command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state ON command, a signal is generated from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) and a signal is generated from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame There is a command that indicates an open error). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, if the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing for reporting or canceling the notification of error or illegality is executed (
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command indicating the number of out balls It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the processing when the number of out-balls is received is executed (B1
320), ending the one-shot command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the out ball number command (B
If the result of 1319 is "N"), then it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a count command (large winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for counting the big winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command process ends.

If the MODE section does not indicate a count command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1321 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is executed in step A of FIG. 6B.
It is included in the command 1046 for recovery from power failure and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE part represents a setting value information command (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception processing, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 (B
If the result of 1323 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a probability setting change command (A
1030). Then, when the MODE part indicates a setting change command (B13
25 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change related information setting process, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the effect control device 300 (
If the result of B1325 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, a command during probability setting confirmation (
A1033). When the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation command (B1
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the probability setting confirming command is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirming display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (B1329). It should be noted that the symbol stop command, for example, there is a special figure 1 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 1 stop command) and a special figure 2 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 2 stop command). and MODE
If the part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 3
00 then determines whether or not the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (result of B1330 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to a normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not indicate a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "N
”), or if the command in the MODE part is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”)
, the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 50, the MODE part is decorated with special figure 1 interruption command (A5
413) and the decoration special figure 1 restart command (A7311), the production control device 300
may execute a process of interrupting or restarting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game.

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the prefetch pattern system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 51 shows the production control device 30
0 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a look-ahead symbol system command process executed by 0. FIG.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variation command reception waiting flag indicating that the look-ahead variation command is waiting for reception (B160
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is ended.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 52, the details of the prefetch variation-related command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 52 shows the production control device 30
10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of prefetch variation command processing executed by .0.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation command (B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. When waiting to receive a read-ahead variation command (the result of B1701 is "
Y"), and clears the read-ahead variation-related command reception wait flag (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub board) is the design of the latest pending information (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
(B1703), and acquire the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE part (B1703).
B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION part (ACT part) of the look-ahead variation command
part is obtained (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707).
. If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If the CT part is both other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the MODE part after conversion and the A
The command after conversion composed of the CT part is saved in the latest pending information and the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) corresponding to the number of reservations (B1708). Then, the read-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170
9) Determine whether the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are different types of leeches of the same system,
If the ACT part (the value of the second half variation) of the look-ahead variation command is not converted, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. For example, even in normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop failure and normal reach +1 stop failure.
Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating the reach of the same system to the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , if the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is "N"), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the read-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1710 is "Y"), load the prefetch target pending information (latest pending information) from the prefetching variation command area (B1711), and execute the prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect (B1712). As the look-ahead effect, for example, there are a continuous notice effect (including chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) is generated (B1713). When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (suspension change notice, etc.) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the look-ahead effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the look-ahead effect that occurs is not the effect that starts immediately (B1715
result is "N"), the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect at the time of hold shift (when the hold display is moved, when the number of holds is decreased) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the latest pending prefetch effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), or if the generated prefetch effect is not an immediate start effect (B171
If the result of 5 is "N"), leave it as it is. Terminates look-ahead variation command processing.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 receives the pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
command) to set the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
part), and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180
2). Here, in special figure 1 and special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, using the table for each MODE, the design classification is set. In the present embodiment, the symbol types correspond to the lost symbols, the 10R probability variable big hit symbols, the 4R probability variable big hit symbols, and the 10R normal big hit symbols shown in FIG.

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

Effect control device 300, special figure type (special figure 1
Or special figure 2) determines whether it is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. When the fluctuation system command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, to terminate the variable command processing.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1
904), a variable effect setting process for setting a variable effect that is a variable effect is executed (B19
05). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and the number of times of the read-ahead effect of the continuous notice effect (remaining number of times of the continuous notice effect) is not 0 -1 updated (B1907
).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 54) described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, production mode, setting value (probability setting value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type (B200
3). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

Production control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a reach-less variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is a reach variation, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, A first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and a first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the fluctuation pattern type is set. (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Note that the lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, the setting value (probability setting value) corresponding to the second half advance notice distribution group address table is set (B2007), and the variable command The address of the second half advance notice allocation group table corresponding to the ACT part is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for the notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). Note that the lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010). In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the setting value (probability setting value, setting) is determined (B2012). After that, a stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decoration special symbol variation display game is executed according to the content of the variable effect such as the ready-to-win effect and the notice effect (B2013). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of setting suggestion effect (B2014). Perform display settings for variable effects such as ready-to-win effects (B2015), and perform display settings for advance notice effects (B20
16). Next, set the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type, for example, set the display to reduce the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time Corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read out (B2017). Subsequently, a sound number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

It should be noted that the voice number and decoration number can be set not only based on the content of the effect, but also by lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to a set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can select from the lighting mode of the decoration device, that is, the lighting mode of the decoration light-emitting portion (LED).
You can enjoy guessing the set value (probability set value) of .

Next, the production control device 300 performs the display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2019), the display setting of the fourth symbol variation related to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed in addition to the first to third special symbols (B2020). In addition, the fourth pattern variation is the display device 41
The lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the above, and/or
It is displayed on the display device 41 .

[Processing of winning commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning system command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command indicates fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the win-related command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the win-related command is a big-win fanfare command or a small-win fanfare command, fanfare effect setting processing for setting a fanfare effect. (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (
B2103), the winning system command processing is terminated. In addition, the round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents a round ( B2104). If the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the hit system command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, (B2105, B21
06), the winning system command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107
result is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is the interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 The status flag is set to "interval" (B2108, B2109), and the winning system command processing is terminated. When the small winning opening is opened only once, that is, when the small winning is one round, there is no interval command.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate an interval (B2107
result is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit system command indicates the ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (B21
10 result is "Y"), that is, if the hit system command is the ending command or the small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, The game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and the winning system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate the ending (B2
If the result of 110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the winning command process without executing any process.

The setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 66. FIG.

[Time chart of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 57 is a time chart of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which the setting suggestion effect is executed multiple times in a predetermined period in relation to the special figure variation display game. As a specific example, the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 3
When the game ball wins at 7, the special figure fluctuation display game is started, the first setting suggestion effect (setting notification effect) is performed before normal reach (first reach) occurs, and after normal reach,
A case will be described where the second setting suggestion effect is executed after SP reach occurs (may not occur) and before the end of the special figure variation display game. In addition, the number of times may be not only two times but also three or more times.

The setting suggestion effect is, for example, when displaying a variable display game on the display device 41 (FIG. 4). This is an effect in which the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the number of displayed items, and it occurs with a predetermined probability (about 1/100 in this embodiment). The setting suggesting effect also occurs at timings other than the variable display game (for example, when the out-of-ball error is canceled).

Character A suggests, for example, a so-called odd number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is
It suggests (reports) that it is one of the odd probability setting values (1, 3, 5) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). Note that the internal probability setting value 1 stored in the probability setting value area
to 6 correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively.

Character B, for example, suggests a so-called even setting, and the currently set probability setting value is
It suggests (informs) that it is one of the even probability setting values (2, 4, 6) among the probability setting values (1 to 6).

Character C, for example, suggests (announces) that the currently set probability setting value is one of the high settings (probability setting values (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It is something to do.

In the setting suggestion effect of the first time, 1 to 3 characters each of character A, character B, and character C are displayed. In the second setting suggesting effect, 1 to 10 of characters A, B, and C are displayed, and 4 to 10 are likely to be selected. For example, the difference in the number of characters A, B, and C displayed is made more conspicuous than in the first time, and which character is used for the setting suggestion intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100). You can make a decision.

[Reliability of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the reliability of setting suggestion effects performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 58 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

In the setting suggesting effect, for example, depending on the number of characters A, B, and C, the reliability of the setting suggesting effect by the characters can be set. The reliability can be set according to the number of characters by drawing lots with the winning probability according to the setting of the number of characters. When a lottery is performed by sorting into each number, the winning probability becomes a sorting rate (selection rate). If the lottery is drawn independently for each number instead of allocating them, there is a possibility that duplicate winnings may occur (for example, 4 and 7), in which case one of the winnings is selected.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be performed only by the character with the largest number among characters A, B, and C (the number of characters that are not the largest number is drawn and displayed regardless of the setting so as not to suggest setting). do).

As described above, in the first setting suggestion effect, 1 to 3 characters each of character A, character B, and character C are displayed. Therefore, when the number of characters A to C is 1, 2, or 3, a lottery is drawn with a winning probability according to the setting.

As described above, in the second setting suggestion effect, characters A, B, and C are each displayed 1 to 10 times. four,
In the cases of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10, lotteries are drawn with winning probabilities corresponding to the settings. In addition, since 4 to 10 pieces are more likely to be selected, the winning probability of 4 to 10 pieces is 1
Make the winning probability significantly higher than ~3 (extremely reduce the winning probability of 1 to 3 to zero)
.

As shown in FIG. 58, each time the number of displayed characters A, B, and C increases by one, the reliability is set to increase by 10%, and when 10 characters are displayed, the reliability is set to 100%. can do. For example, 1, 2, and 3 characters C appear evenly in any setting, and the reliability of high setting suggestion is low.

Also, the reliability shown in FIG. 58 can be multiplied by the ratio between the total number of displayed characters and the number of displayed characters with the largest number of displayed characters.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times during the variable display game. In the suggested production, the size of the increase of a specific character (not the number of characters),
The reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified. For example, the setting suggestion by the character with the largest increase amount may be set as the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100), and the reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified based on the magnitude of the increase amount. It is possible.

The setting suggestion effect is set in steps B2012 and B2014 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55), as described above.

[Expectation of jackpot]
FIG. 59 is an example of a table showing the relationship between setting suggestion effects and big wins performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 59(A), in this embodiment, the degree of expectation for a "jackpot" is set high when the setting suggestion effect occurs, and is set low when it does not occur. FIG. 59 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

When the "big win" occurs, the ratio of occurrence of the "big win" after the setting suggestion performance is set to 80%, and the ratio of occurrence of the "big win" without the setting suggestion performance is assigned to 20%.

Conversely, when "mismatch" occurs, the rate of occurrence of "mismatch" after setting suggestion performance is set to 1%, and the rate of occurrence of "mismatch" without setting suggestion presentation is set to 99%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion performance, the player can be given a sense of expectation that a ``big win'' will occur after that, and even if there is no setting suggestion performance, the player can expect a ``big win'' to occur. can surprise you.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), setting suggestions are made by changing the first mode (for example, number and color) of the characters appearing in the setting suggestion effect, and the big hit is achieved by the second mode (for example, size) of the characters. It is also possible to report the degree of expectation. As described above, the effect control device 300 (game control device 100)
) can perform the intended setting suggestion effect. Further, when any one of character A, character B, and character C has a color different from that of the other characters, the setting suggested by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) is intended by the character having the different color. It is also possible to perform.

When a "big hit" occurs, the ratio of occurrence of the "big hit" after the setting suggestion performance displayed by the large character is set to 50%, and the "big hit" occurs after the setting suggestion performance displayed by the character smaller than the large character. ” is generated at 30%, and the ratio at which “jackpot” is generated without setting suggestion effect is 20%.

Conversely, when "mismatch" occurs, the ratio of occurrence of "mismatch" after the setting suggestion effect displayed by the large character is set to 1%, and after the setting suggestion effect displayed by the character smaller than the large character. It is assumed that the percentage of occurrence of "missing" is 1%, and the percentage of occurrence of "missing" without setting suggestion effect is 98%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a "big hit" will occur after that, and by performing the setting suggestion effect with a particularly large character display, the expectation can be enhanced. It can be further enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 60 is a screen transition diagram of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. Here, a case will be described in which the setting suggestion effect is executed when executing the decorative special figure variable display game in which the variable display develops from the normal reach to the SP reach. The setting suggestion effect is executed before normal reach (first time) and when SP reach (SP3 reach) occurs (second time).

(A1) of FIG. 60 is a display screen when starting the decoration special figure variation display game. A variable display area 610 (left area 610A, middle area 610C, right area 610
B) is arranged, and the decoration stop pattern “6, 1, 2” is displayed in the variable display area 610 . In addition, a variable display area 615 is arranged in the lower right corner of the display device 41, and the variable display area 6
At 15, the stop symbol "6, 1, 2" is displayed. Also, in the special figure 1 reserved number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display part 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the number "3" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved A number "0" indicating the number is displayed.

In the first suspension display portion 630a that displays the first starting memory as the first suspension display, the suspension display 633 (first suspension display) moves to the right (hold shift), and the first suspension is displayed in the storage digest area 640 of the rectangular frame. The pending display 633 on the right end of the display section 630a moves. At present, the suspension display 633 is not displayed in the second suspension display portion 630b that displays the second start memory as the second suspension display (second start memory display).

After that, in (A2), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration special pattern (large pattern) as the identification information is being executed in the variation display area 610, and the variation (↓↓) of the decoration reduced pattern (small pattern) as the identification information.
↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615 . In the left region 610A, the right region 610B, and the middle region 610C of the variable display region 610, the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern are fluctuating, respectively. In addition, a change pending display 633a indicating a hold related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed (a starting memory that has become the execution right of this special figure fluctuation display game) is displayed in the reservation digestion area 640. Also, in the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, the number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number are displayed respectively. ing.

At this time, as the first setting suggestion effect, the display device 41 displays character A (bear).
, character B (frog), and character C (tiger) are displayed. In (A2), two characters A, two characters B, and one character C are displayed.
The reliability of setting suggestions for character B is 20%, the reliability of setting suggestions for character B is 20%, and the reliability of setting suggestions for character C is 10%.
00) is making the intended setting suggestions.

However, for the player who knows that the setting suggestion effect will be performed multiple times, it is possible to foresee that the setting suggestion effect with high reliability will be performed in the next setting suggestion effect, so the setting suggestion is not clear in this way. To make a player pay attention to the performance and concentrate on the game even if it is the setting suggesting performance.

The display position of each character is arbitrary, and may be displayed as a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image in which the expression and display position of each character move.

Next, in (A3), the ready-to-win state (normal reach) is reached, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first setting suggesting effect is completed. In addition, in (A3), the display of each character is erased, but the display may be continued as it is. Also, at this time, the character display 755
a “Reach” is displayed below the variable display area 610 .

After that, in (A4), reach develops from the state of normal reach to SP3 reach, and a movie effect (animation effect) is executed in the center of the display screen, and the left pattern and right pattern appear in the upper corners of the screen. Moving. At this time, the character display 755a "Reach" may disappear.

In addition, along with the shift to SP3 ready-to-win, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. Here, for example, character A, character B, and character C are displayed around the movie effect (moving image effect), and are displayed more than the setting suggestion effect of the first time. In (A4), 3 characters A, 4 characters B, and 5 characters C are displayed. Here, an example is shown in which setting suggestions are made based on the number (five) of characters C with the largest number of characters displayed, and the reliability of setting suggestions for character C (probability set value is either 5 or 6) is set at 50%. can be displayed (set) as

In addition, the number of characters C with the largest number of characters displayed (5) and the total number of characters displayed (3 + 4 +
5 = 12), the reliability of character C's setting suggestion is (5/12) x 50% = 20
. It can also be displayed (set) as 8%. At this time, in order to notify that the reliability of setting suggestion by character C is higher, lottery may be performed so that the number of characters A or B displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is smaller than that in the first time. .

Furthermore, one character C is displayed the first time, five characters are displayed the second time, and the number of characters C is increased by four. Therefore, for example, if the increase in reliability per character is 10%, the reliability of the setting suggestion for the second character C can be set to 4×10% of the increase (regardless of the number).

After that, in (A5), the special figure variation display game ends, the setting suggestion effect also ends, the big hit decorative stop pattern "3, 3, 3" is displayed in the variable display area 610, and the big hit stop pattern "3" is displayed. , 3, 3” are displayed in the variable display area 615 . In addition, a character display 755b "big win!!" is displayed under the decoration stop pattern. Also, at this time, the change pending display 633a displayed in the pending digestion area 640 disappears, thereby confirming that one suspension has been completely digested.

Subsequently, in (A6), a big hit round game starts, and a big hit state (special game state)
At the same time, the production of the big hit round is started. In addition, in the setting suggesting effect (first and/or second time), character A, character B, and character C are displayed larger than in the case shown in FIG. Notification (setting) may be performed.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect (first modification)]
FIG. 61 is a time chart of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first modification, a pseudo continuous effect consisting of a predetermined number of times (three times) of pseudo fluctuations is executed before the normal reach occurs, the first setting suggestion effect occurs during the second pseudo fluctuation, and the second time A setting suggestion effect occurs during the third pseudo-fluctuation. The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of times of the pseudo variation may be determined in step B2010 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55), for example. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which a pseudo-variation of varying and temporarily stopping the decorative special symbol (identification information) is performed a predetermined number of times (predetermined steps) from the start to the end of one variable display game.

Character A (red) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called odd setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an odd probability setting value (1, 3 , 5).

Character B (blue) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called even setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an even probability setting value (2, 4 , 6).

For character C (yellow) (FIG. 62A), for example, the currently set probability setting value is a high setting (one of the probability setting values (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests that there is

In the first modified example, a group effect is executed in which a plurality of characters form a character group and are displayed. In the character group, the total number of character A (red) and character B (blue) is fixed (or
approximately constant), and depending on the ratio, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is an even number or an odd number is reported. In the character group, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the number of characters C (yellow) is high and the probability setting value is "5, 6" is reported. Character A and character B may have the same shape, but only different colors.

Character A (red) and character B (blue) suggest odd number setting and even number setting, which are mutually exclusive events. The reliability of setting suggestions can be reported.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of character A (red): character B (blue) is set to 7
: 3, and in the second setting suggestion effect, by setting the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) to 9: 1, the reliability of the setting suggestion of the odd setting with the probability setting value is odd degree can be increased. For example, with a ratio of 7:3, the odd setting has a confidence of 70% (the even setting has a confidence of 3
0%), and with a ratio of 9:1, the odd setting has a confidence of 90% (the even setting has a confidence of 10%).
).

Conversely, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red):character B (blue) is set to 3:7, and in the second setting suggestion effect, character A (red):character B By setting the ratio of the number of (blue) to 1:9, it is possible to increase the reliability of even-numbered setting suggestions with even-numbered probability setting values. For example, with a ratio of 3:7 the even setting has a confidence of 70% (the odd setting has a confidence of 30%) and with a ratio of 1:9 the even setting has a confidence of 90% (the odd setting has a confidence of 10%).

Furthermore, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is set to 5, and in the second setting suggestion effect, the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is increased to 7, so that the probability It is also possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion that the setting value is a high setting.

In the first modified example, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, when character C (character A or character B may be used) is not displayed, or when none of character A, character B, or character C is displayed, a big hit is performed. Expectations can be set as low. Further, when all characters A, B, and C are displayed, it is possible to set that the expectation of a big hit is high.

It is also possible to set the degree of expectation for a big win to change based on changes in the size and color of characters A, B, and C displayed. When the character performing the setting suggestion effect indicates that the expectation of the big hit is high in this way, it may be performed together with the display mode change indicating that the expectation of the big hit is high in the change pending display 633a of the pending digestion area 640. Alternatively, the change in the display mode may be prohibited so that the player can pay attention to the setting suggestion effect.

[Screen transition diagram (first modification)]
FIG. 62A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 62B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

(B1) in FIG. 62A is the same as (A1) in FIG. (B2) of FIG. 62A is the
0 (A2), but the variable display displayed in the variable display area 610 is the first pseudo-variation of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Then, in (B3), the first pseudo-variation (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, and the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle area 610C, pseudo-continuous symbols suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect. appears stopped. Also, the number of pseudo fluctuations to be started from now on (pseudo run count)
A character display 752 "pseudo twice" is displayed.

After that, in (B4), the second pseudo-variation starts and the first setting suggestion effect (
Group production) is performed. For example, as shown in (B4), character A (* star), character B (
A star-shaped star ☆) and character C (triangle △) show an image of a meteor shower flowing from right to left on the screen for a predetermined period of time. By playing the image, it is possible to notify that the expectation of a big win is high.

At this time, for example, the ratio of the number of displayed characters A (red) and the number of displayed characters B (blue) is
The ratio is 7:3, indicating that the reliability of the setting suggestion for the odd number setting is somewhat high.
In addition, since the character C (yellow) is also displayed, it is possible to suggest that the high setting is set by the display of the character C (yellow) with a predetermined reliability (FIG. 58 may be used). It should be noted that while the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is being performed, the character display 752 "pseudo twice" may remain displayed or may be deleted.

Next, in (B5), the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. Also in (B5), the character display 752 "pseudo twice" may remain displayed or may be deleted.
Note that the second pseudo-variation continues in the variation display area 610 .

Then, in (B6), the second pseudo-fluctuation is completed and the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle area 610C, the pseudo-continuous symbols suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect are stop-displayed. At the same time, a character display 7 indicating the number of pseudo-variation executions to be started (pseudo-continuous number)
52 "Pseudo 3 times" is displayed.

After that, in (B7) of FIG. 62B, the pseudo fluctuation of the third fluctuation decoration special pattern (large pattern) (
↓↓↓) is executed in the variable display area 610 for a predetermined time.

After that, in (B8), the second setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. At this time, (B
As in 4), an image in which meteor showers by characters A, B, and C flow from right to left on the screen for a predetermined period of time. However, this time, the ratio of the number of displayed characters A (red) to the number of displayed characters B (blue) is 9:1, and the reliability of the odd number setting is further increased.

In addition, since the number of characters C (yellow) displayed has also increased from 5 to 7, it is possible to notify that the reliability of setting suggestions has increased by the increase (see FIG. 58). 2 on the contrary
When the number of characters C (yellow) displayed does not increase or decreases in the second setting suggestion effect, it is also possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion by the display of character C (yellow) is not so high. can.

Next, in (B9), a ready-to-win state is entered, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the setting suggesting effect (group effect) ends. In this case, since the pseudo-continuous effect has ended, the middle area 61
Pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed in 0C. In addition, the character display 755 “Reach” is displayed in the variable display area 6
10 is displayed below.

After that, in (B10), the special figure variation display game is ended, and the "loss" stop pattern "3, 1, 3" is displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615. FIG. Also, at this time
The change pending display 633a displayed in the pending digestion area 640 disappears, thereby confirming that one pending has been completely digested.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect (second modification)]
FIG. 63 is a time chart of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the game machine 10, there is a case where a character zone effect (for example, an advance notice effect using the entire display screen) is performed with a predetermined probability based on a pending winning with a high expectation of a big win, and this character zone effect causes a big win. It is possible to notify that the degree of expectation is high.

Therefore, in the second modified example, setting suggestion performance is performed with a predetermined probability when entering the character zone, and by the appearance of the setting suggestion performance, it is reported that the expectation of the big win is higher than when only the character zone occurs.

In addition, the character zone continues until the hold that triggered the entry into the character zone is digested, and during that time, a plurality of variable display games are performed as the hold is digested. At this time, the setting suggestion effect is performed each time the variable display game is started, and the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased each time.

Thus, in the second modification, the character zone effect is executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games as a look-ahead effect based on suspension (a look-ahead zone effect). 52). In addition, not limited to this, character zone production,
Predetermined opportunity (timing) such as when the expectation of a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is high
, and may be executed over a plurality of variable display games, and the variable effect setting process (
FIG. 55) or the like.

In the second modification, the first start memory (or the second start memory) already has three holds (hold 3,
In the case of holding 2, holding 1), the holding (holding 0) with a high expectation of a big win wins, and holding 3, holding 2, holding 1, holding 0 are consumed in this order.

Then, when the suspension 3 is consumed, the first setting suggestion effect is performed, when the suspension 2 is digested, the second setting suggestion effect is performed, and when the suspension 1 is digested, the third setting suggestion effect is performed, When the hold 0 is digested, the setting suggestion effect for the 4th time is performed.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A suggesting setting odd probability setting values are displayed, two characters B suggesting setting even probability setting values are displayed, and high setting probability setting values are displayed. Character C suggesting is not displayed (0 pieces are displayed).

In the second setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A suggesting setting of odd-numbered probability setting values are displayed, three characters B suggesting setting even-numbered probability setting values are displayed, and high setting probability setting values are displayed. One character C suggesting is displayed.

In the third setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A suggesting setting of odd-numbered probability setting values are displayed, five characters B suggesting setting even-numbered probability setting values are displayed, and high probability setting values are displayed. Four characters C suggesting are displayed.

In the fourth setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A suggesting setting of odd-numbered probability setting values are displayed, five characters B suggesting setting even-numbered probability setting values are displayed, and high probability setting values are displayed. Seven characters C suggesting are displayed.

In this way, the number of characters to be displayed that performs the setting suggestion intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) is increased as the number of times of the special figure variation display game is increased. Figure 63
Then, since the number of displayed character B has increased and is larger than that of character A, it is assumed that the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is an even number is higher than the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is an odd number. I can judge.

In addition, since the number of displayed characters C increases with the number of times of the special figure variation display game, such as 0, 1, 4, and 7, the display mode (increase amount) of character C is set to be high. It is also possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion of is high.

Conversely, if the number of displayed characters C does not increase or decreases even after the number of special figure variation display games is repeated, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the display mode (decrease amount) of character C is set to high is low. It is also possible to report that it is low.

[Screen transition diagram (second modification)]
FIG. 64A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 64B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

(C1) in FIG. 64A is a display screen when starting the decorative special figure variation display game, and FIG.
A stop symbol is displayed in the same manner as 0 (A1). In the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660, the number "4" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number are displayed respectively. .

In (C1), a first suspension display section 630 that displays the first starting memory as a first suspension display
In a, the pending display 633 (holding 3) moves to the right (holding shift), and the holding display 633 at the right end of the first holding display portion 630a moves to the holding digest area 640 of the rectangular frame.

Here, the reservation display 633 (reservation 0) displayed in the first reservation display portion 630a is pre-determined as one in which the expectation of a big hit is high at the time of winning and the setting suggestion effect is performed. As a result, the hold display 633 (hold 0) changes to a display mode different in color and the like from the other holds to indicate that the degree of expectation is high, but this display mode may be omitted.

After that, in (C2), the same variable display as in (A3) of FIG. 60 is performed, and the digestion of Hold 3 is started. At this time, a pending change display 633 a indicating a pending (holding 3) related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 . At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is "3".

Also, when starting the digestion of hold 3, the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the character zone is entered, and the background (color, pattern, etc.) displayed on the display device 41 changes.

In (C2), three characters A (bear) are displayed, two characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is not displayed.

By the way, as described above, the suspension display 633 (suspension 0) is preliminarily determined as indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high at the time of winning and that the setting suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, it is also possible to enter the character zone at the stage (stage before (C1)) in which Suspended 0 has won. However, by having the player rush into the character zone when completing the hold 3, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the hold 3.

After that, in (C3), the first variable display game ends, and the stop symbols "3, 2, 9" of "lost" are displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is suspended. With the disappearance of 633a, the pending 3 is already digested. At this time, character A, character B
However, when it moves to a position that does not overlap the stop symbol "3, 2, 9" or is erased, the first setting suggestion effect is completed.

Next, in (C4), the same variable display as in (C2) is performed, and the digestion of hold 2 is started. At this time, a pending change display 633 a indicating a pending (holding 2) related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 . At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is "2".

Also, when digestion of hold 2 is started, a second setting suggestion effect is performed, three characters A (bear) are displayed, three characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. 1 is displayed.

After that (C5), the second variable display game ends, and the stop symbols "5, 7, 8" of "lost" are displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is suspended. With the disappearance of 633a as well, Pending 2 has been digested. At this time, character A, character B
, Character C moves to a position that does not overlap the stop symbols "5, 7, 8" or is erased, thereby ending the second setting suggesting effect.

Next, at (C6), the same variable display as at (C2) and (C4) is performed, and the digestion of Hold 1 is started. At this time, suspension related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed (suspension 1)
is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 . Also, special figure 1
The special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the reservation number display unit 650 is "1".

In addition, when starting the digestion of hold 1, the third setting suggestion effect is performed, three characters A (bear) are displayed, five characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. 4 are displayed.

After that, in (C7), the third variable display game ends, and the stop symbol "4, 2, 1" of "lost" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is suspended. 633a also disappears, so that Pending 1 has been digested. At this time, character A, character B
, Character C moves to a position where it does not overlap with the stop symbol "4, 2, 1" or is erased, thereby completing the third setting suggesting effect.

Next, at (C8), a variable display similar to (C2), (C4) and (C6) is performed, and digestion of pending 0 is started. At this time, a pending change display 633 a indicating a pending (holding 0) related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640 . At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is "0".

In addition, when starting the digestion of hold 0, the fourth setting suggestion effect is performed, three characters A (bear) are displayed, five characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. 7 are displayed.

After that (C9), the fourth variable display game ends, and the stop symbols "2, 6, 9" of "lost" are displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is suspended. When 633a also disappears, Suspension 1 is completed, and the character zone ends. At this time, character A, character B, and character C are erased, and the fourth setting suggesting effect is completed.

[Other setting suggestions]
FIG. 65 is a diagram explaining an example of another setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 65, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 by a right-handed hitting instruction display 620 of the hitting instruction display instead of the character. In this case, the reliability of the high setting may be increased as the number of right-handed hitting indications 620 increases.

Also, even during the special figure variation display game, if the timing is such that the player can easily pay attention to the display device 41, the setting suggestion effect may be executed. In the example of FIG. 65, when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the special game state, such as in the event of a big win fanfare, the setting suggesting effect is executed by the right-hand hitting instruction display 620 . In this way, by executing the setting suggesting effect at a timing at which the player can easily pay attention, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being overlooked. In addition, a display 621 "Aim for the gate!" is also displayed, suggesting that a game ball should be hit to the normal pattern starting gate 34 by hitting to the right when the big hit is fanfared.

When a distribution gate for selecting the upper limit of the number of rounds for a big hit is provided in the game area 32 on the right side, a display 621 may indicate that the distribution gate is aimed instead of the normal pattern start gate 34 . In addition, since the jackpot round does not start until the game ball passes through the distribution gate, it is possible to further prevent overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

FIG. 66 is a diagram explaining another example of another setting suggestion effect. In the example of FIG. 66, an error that the player cannot intentionally cause and has to interrupt the game (here, ball out error)
When is generated, the setting suggestion effect is executed. Even in this way, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a timing at which the player is likely to pay attention, thereby preventing the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

During the decorative special figure variation display game started at (D1) in FIG. 66, as shown in (D2), a ball-out error occurs due to the detection of the shot ball-out switch signal, and an error display 623 "ball-out error" is displayed. be done. A character 625 is displayed together with an error display 623, and the high-set reliability is notified by the display mode (expression) of the character 625. FIG. After that, (D3
), an error cancellation display 627 indicating that the error has been cancelled, and the character 625 are displayed together with the display mode (expression) of the character 625.
also reports a high confidence level.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
According to the above, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes the effect control means (the effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the variable display game that variably displays the identification information. is a special result, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, a setting change means (setting key switch 93 , RAM initialization switch 112), and the production control means (production control device 300) can execute a setting suggestion production that suggests information (probability setting value) about the setting value a plurality of times in a predetermined period.

With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect is performed multiple times in a predetermined period (for example, the period of one variable display game or the period of a plurality of variable display games) in relation to the variable display game, etc. It is possible to focus on the game by making the player pay attention to the game, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect multiple times in one variable display game.

With the above configuration, by increasing the degree of attention to one variable display game in which the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect multiple times over a plurality of variable display games.

With the above configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance and concentrate on the game by performing the setting suggesting performance in accordance with the timing of the performance such as the zone performance, which is performed over a plurality of variable display games.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured so that the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect to be executed later is higher than the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect to be executed first. , to set the setting suggestion effect multiple times.

With the above configuration, by providing a difference in the reliability of setting suggestions depending on the timing,
While watching the performance, the player enjoys waiting whether or not the performance suggesting the setting appears at a specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and to concentrate on the game by heightening the expectation for the setting suggestion effect that appears next.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game will be a special result by causing the setting suggestion effect to appear, and the mode of the setting suggestion effect. (increase in the number of characters, etc.), the reliability of suggestion of the setting suggestion effect is changed.

By associating the setting suggestion performance with the degree of expectation of the special result (big hit) with the above configuration, even a player who is playing the game without worrying about the probability set value can pay attention to the performance, and the mode of the setting suggestion performance. By associating the change of , with the reliability of setting suggestion, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance and concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the display device 41 to display the same type of image (character A, character B, character C) in a plurality of setting suggestion effects. The effect modes of the setting suggestion effect of the times are associated with each other.

With the above configuration, by displaying the same type of character a plurality of times in setting suggestion effects, the setting suggestion effects performed a plurality of times are related to each other, and by paying attention to them, it is possible to grasp the setting suggestions, The player can be made to pay attention to the performance and to concentrate on the game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to a variable display game that variably displays identification information, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In this case, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player, setting change means (setting key switch 93, RAM initial The production control means (production control device 300) can execute a setting suggestion production that suggests information (probability setting value) about the setting value, and by making the setting suggestion production appear, the variable display It is characterized in that it is possible to report the degree of expectation that the game stop result will be a special result.

With the above configuration, by performing the setting suggestion effect associated with the degree of expectation of the special result (big hit), it is possible to prevent overlooking of the setting suggestion effect.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect by displaying the characters (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41. FIG.

With the above configuration, setting suggestion rendering can be performed in a simple and easily identifiable manner.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the configuration having the same function as in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. second
The embodiment relates to display probability setting values in a setting variable state (setting change mode) and how to display them.

[Setting value for work, probability setting value for display, effect control information]
FIG. 67 shows work set values and display probability set values of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (setting example 1,
2, 3, 4) and production control information (production set value, production set value) is a table showing the correspondence relationship. Normally, the game control device 100 holds six work set values "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" (set values), and correspondingly probability set values (information about set values There is a jackpot probability (
and information corresponding to small hit probability)) "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6". However, depending on the gaming machine 10, a big hit probability (and a small hit probability) corresponding to different probability setting values
are the same, and the number of types of display probability setting values may be less than six.
That is, in order to prevent confusion among hall personnel and the like, even if the probability setting values used or stored inside the gaming machine 10 are different, the same big-hit probability (and small-hit probability) is the same. The probability setting values for display associated with the winning probability) are set to be the same. The same display probability setting means the same big win probability (and small win probability).

In setting example 1 of FIG. 67, display probability setting values 1-6 are set for work setting values 0-5, respectively, and the display probability setting values are set to different values. Setting example 2 represents a case where the display probability setting values corresponding to the six work setting values are all set to "1". In setting example 3, the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values "0", "1" and "2" are set to "1", respectively, and the work setting values "3", "4" and " 5” shows a case where the display probability setting value corresponding to “5” is set to “2”. In setting example 4, work setting values "0", "1
are set to "1" respectively, and the working set values "2" and "3" are set.
is set to "2", and the display probability setting values corresponding to work setting values "4" and "5" are set to "3".

In setting example 1, the display probability setting value changes each time the RAM initialization switch 112 as the setting value change switch is pressed. can be identified as reacting.

On the other hand, in setting example 2, regardless of the value of the work setting value, all display probability setting values are "1
, the display probability set value is displayed as "1
” remains unchanged, and the operator cannot identify whether or not the display of the performance display device 152 (display section) responds to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 . Also, in setting example 3, the setting values for work are changed from "0" to "1", from "1" to "2", from "3" to "4", and "4".
It cannot be identified whether or not the game machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation when changing from to "5". Furthermore, in setting example 4, the setting value for work is changed from "0" to "1".
”, “2” to “3”, and “4” to “5”, respectively, it cannot be identified whether the game machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation.

Therefore, in this embodiment, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, that is, every time the working set value is changed, the display probability set value is temporarily changed to the RAM initialization switch 111.
By making a display different from before and after pressing 2, it is possible to identify whether or not the game machine 10 (game control device 100) is responding to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing in this embodiment is similar to that in the first embodiment, but intermediate data (intermediate information) is transmitted (displayed) to the performance display device 152 .

As shown in FIG. 68, the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or register) is updated by +1 within the range of "0" to "5", and the probability set value corresponding to the work set value After updating the probability setting values 1 to 6 of the area by +1 (A2410), the intermediate data is set in the probability setting value display data area as the probability setting value display data (A2411), and the set probability setting value display data (intermediate data ) is output (A2412). In this case, the performance display device 152 is in a display mode based on the intermediate data until the next probability set value display data is output (A2404). If the intermediate data is displayed for a short time and the operator cannot recognize it, the probability setting value display data (intermediate data) may be output and then a timer may be operated to delay the display for a predetermined period of time.

As a display form of the intermediate data, LEDs (light-emitting members: here, 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp) for displaying the numbers of each digit of the 4-digit performance display device 152 ) are turned off (FIGS. 69 and 70), and all LEDs are turned on (FIG. 71
), and a display mode (FIG. 72) in which a specific position of a part of the LED is turned on (different from the display mode showing the probability set value for display).

In addition, there is also a display mode in which the display of the probability set value for display is left as it is, and at least one of the LEDs of the digits different from the digit for displaying the probability set value for display is lit (FIG. 73).

Further, during the setting change, the information of the probability setting value for display transmitted (displayed) by the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) to the performance display device 152 includes LEDs (segments a, b , c, d, e, f, g), as well as the lighting pattern data for lighting the L
Dot data (Dp
=1) (additional information) is included. Therefore, as intermediate data, a display mode (FIG. 74) in which all the LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 including dots are turned off, the segment Dp
There is also a display mode (FIG. 75) in which all the other LEDs are extinguished while the lighting of the LEDs is maintained.

By the way, the game control device 100 transmits the information of the work setting value (probability setting value) after setting change to the production control device 300 (FIG. 4) (FIG. 6B, A1044), and the production control device 30
0 is received (FIG. 50, B1323) and can be used as an effect set value (set value for effect). Then, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG.
' to '5' corresponding to the effect control information '1' to '6' as effect set values.
Here, the effect control device 300 can make the effect different in content based on the effect control information "1" to "6" as effect set values. For example, in the variable effect setting process of FIG. 55, the effect contents are set based on the set value. As a result, every time the probability setting value is changed, the performance control information is changed to give variation to the performance, thereby improving the interest in the game machine 10.例文帳に追加

[Display example of the performance display device]
FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting values of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The intermediate data in FIG.
It has a display mode in which all D are turned off.

In addition, the probability set value display data is the character "S" in the 3rd digit of the performance display device 152, and "
The LEDs light up so that the letter "E" appears, the letter "T" appears in digit 1 (so that the letter "SET" appears), and the current display probability setting value appears in digit 0. It has a display mode for In addition, the probability setting value display data is set so that the LEDs of digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3 are extinguished, and the current probability setting value for display appears in digit 0 (other digits may be displayed). LE
It is also possible to provide a display mode in which D lights up.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the setting change mode (setting variable state) is entered. In this case, the game control device 1
00 of the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c (here, an arbitrary value from "1" to "6", which corresponds to the value obtained by adding 1 to the last final working setting value ) is read out, and the digit 3 of the performance display device 152 is "S", the digit 2 is "E", and the digit 1 is "
The characters "T" appear respectively, the value "1" of one type of display probability setting value is lit at the digit 0, and the characters "SET1" are lit and displayed as a whole. When entering the variable setting state (setting change mode), a value corresponding to the probability setting value read out from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted from the probability setting value) is stored in the working setting value area (RAM 111c or register). value) may be stored.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the work set value is changed (for example, from "0" to "1"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are extinguished for a predetermined time. Alternatively, a display mode may be adopted in which the display probability set value "1" is temporarily turned off while "SET" is kept turned on.

Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed, the characters "SET1" including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "1") (there is no change in appearance). lights up.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the work set value is changed (for example, "
1” to “2”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are extinguished for a predetermined time.

Then, after the predetermined time has passed, the characters "SET1" including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2") (there is no change in appearance). lights up.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the characters "SET1" including the display probability set value "1" are temporarily extinguished and then re-illuminated. , are turned off when the setting key switch 93 is turned off. Further, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work set values in the work set value area are changed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the last updated work set values are restored. A corresponding probability setting is stored in the probability setting area.

FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 or setting example 3 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment.

First, in FIG. 70, the case where the display probability setting value is setting example 3 and the working setting value at the start of the setting change is "1" will be considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on,
The performance display device 152 (digit 0) displays the display probability set value "1" corresponding to the work set value "1".
” is lit up and displayed.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the work setting value is changed ("1").
to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are extinguished for a predetermined time.

Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed, the characters "SET1" (no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2") are displayed. Lights up.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the work setting value is changed (from "2" to "3"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are extinguished for a predetermined time.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the characters "SET2" including the display probability set value "2" corresponding to the changed work set value "3" are lit. This allows the operator to
By pressing the initialization switch 112, it can be visually recognized that the display probability setting value is changed from "1" to "2".

As described above, every time the worker presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability setting values are changed (1→1→2→2→2→1→...) as the work setting values are changed. When the display probability setting value is changed, the display probability setting value is temporarily turned off, and then the next display probability setting value is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 70, for the sake of convenience, consider the case where the probability setting value for display is setting example 4 and the setting value for work at the start of setting change is "0".

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on,
The performance display device 152 (digit 0) displays the display probability set value "1" corresponding to the work set value "0".
” is lit up and displayed.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the work setting value is changed ("0"
to "1"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are extinguished for a predetermined time.

After the predetermined time has elapsed, the characters "SET1" (no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value "1" are displayed. be.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the work set value is changed (from "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are extinguished for a predetermined time.

Then, after the predetermined time has passed, the characters "SET2" including the changed display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "2" are lit. As a result, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2" by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. FIG. After that, although not shown, the RAM initialization switch 112 is
is pressed twice, the characters "SET3" including the display probability setting value "3" corresponding to the work setting value "4" are lit up.

As described above, every time the worker presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability setting values are changed (1→1→2→2→3→3→1→ . . . ) will be changed. Further, when the value of the display probability set value is switched, all the LEDs are turned off for a predetermined time, and then the next display probability set value is lit and displayed. Furthermore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the LEDs are extinguished.

FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing a first modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The modified examples to be described hereinafter will be described using setting example 2 as an example, but can also be applied to setting example 1, setting example 3, and setting example 4.

In the first modification, the intermediate data is the performance display device 1, contrary to FIG. 69 (or FIG. 70).
All LEDs in digit 3, digit 2, digit 1 and digit 0 of 52 are illuminated (at least digit 3
, digit 2, or digit 1 may be illuminated). On the other hand, in the probability setting value display data, the LEDs in digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 of the performance display device 152 are all turned off (as described above, the characters "SET" may be displayed), and in digit 0 A display mode is provided in which an LED that constitutes the display of the display probability setting value is turned on.

The display mode of the display probability set values in the first modification transitions in the same manner as in FIG. On the other hand, R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are all lit for a predetermined time according to the intermediate data, and then the changed display probability setting value is displayed.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lit display of the probability setting value for display of digit 0 disappears for a predetermined time, and instead all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are turned on. Lights up for a predetermined time.

FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The second modified example shown in FIG. 72 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is displayed in the same digit (digit 0) as the display probability setting value, and has a display mode different from the display probability setting value before change and the display probability setting value after change.

As shown in FIG. 72, the intermediate data has, for example, a display mode in which only the digit 0 LED (segment g) is lit. In addition, in the second modified example, any display mode other than the display indicating the display probability setting value can be applied. Other digits (digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1) may also be arbitrarily displayed by intermediate data.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lit display of the probability set value for display of digit 0 disappears for a predetermined time, and instead the LED at a specific position of digit 0 (for example, segment g) is turned off.
lights up for a predetermined time.

FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing a third modified example of the display mode of the display probability set value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The third modified example shown in FIG. 73 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is also displayed in digits (digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1) different from the digit (digit 0) where the probability setting value for display is displayed, and in digit 0, the probability setting value for display is displayed. display is maintained. That is, the intermediate data is different from the display probability setting value before change and the display probability setting value after change as a whole, but the digits for displaying the display probability setting value are different from the display probability setting value before change. It is a display mode for sharing information.

In the third modified example, the game control device 100 displays the information of the probability set value for display (digit 0) stored in the probability set value display data area and the intermediate data (digit 3, digit 2, Digit 1
) and sets the synthesized data (intermediate data) as probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area (FIG. 68, executed in A2411).

As shown in FIG. 73, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are lit. LEDs
lights up, and the LED for displaying the display probability setting value before change in the digit 0 lights up. In addition, the probability setting value display data displays the probability setting value in digit 0, digit 3, and digit 2.
, and digit 1 are extinguished, but the characters "SET" may be displayed in the same manner as described above.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are lit for a predetermined period of time, and the lit display of the probability set value for display is maintained during that time.

FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing a fourth modification of the display mode of the display probability set value of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fourth modification shown in FIG. 74 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display based on the display probability setting value (additional information).

In the fourth modification, the game control device 100 is similar to the above, the RAM initialization switch 11
2 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on to turn on the gaming machine 10, the setting variable state (first state) is entered. At this time, the game control device 100 adds dot data (Dp=1) (additional information) to the probability set value display data. This makes it possible to indicate that the displayed display probability set value "1." is a provisional value that is being changed.

On the other hand, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off. Therefore, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the performance display device 152
LED to display "SET" for digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1, probability setting value for display of digit 0 "1
” and the LED (segment Dp) displaying the dot of the digit 0 are extinguished for a predetermined time.

By turning off the setting key switch 93, the setting end state (second state) is entered. At this time, the game control device 100 displays probability setting value display data (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1 "SET"
is set in the probability setting display data area, the probability setting value for display "1" after the setting change is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the probability setting value for display "1 ” lights up.

FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram showing a fifth modification of the display mode of the display probability set values of setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fifth modification shown in FIG. 75 transitions in the same manner as the display mode of the fourth modification shown in FIG. 74 except for the display of intermediate data.

On the other hand, as intermediate data, an LED indicating "SET" for digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1, and digit 0
The LED that displays the probability setting value for display is turned off, and the dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information)
It has a display mode in which an LED (segment Dp) that displays lights up. Therefore, the RAM
Each time the initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LEDs that display the character "SET" in digits 3, 2, and 1, and the LED that displays the probability setting value for display in digit 0 in the performance display device 152 are extinguished. , the LED (segment Dp) displaying the digit 0 dot remains lit. Therefore, the display of the performance display device 152 responds to the operation, and it can be easily identified that the setting is being changed.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
This embodiment includes game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variation display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a starting condition), and when the result of the game is a special result, In a gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player,
Setting change means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) capable of changing setting values (work setting values, probability setting values) according to game-related settings, and by causing a light emitting member (LED) to emit light. a display unit (performance display device 152) capable of displaying information about values (information corresponding to the probability of a big hit, probability setting value for display);
work set value) is provided with a first switch (RAM initialization switch 112), the game control means (game control device 100) is the first switch (RAM initialization switch 11
In response to the operation of 2), the setting value (work setting value) can be changed, and information (probability setting value for display) about the changed setting value can be displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152). When changing a value (setting value for work), intermediate information (intermediate data )
is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152), information (probability set value for display) on the changed setting value is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152).

With the above configuration, before and after the probability setting value is changed, the intermediate data whose display mode is different from the information on the setting value before and after the change (probability setting value for display) is temporarily displayed. It is possible to identify whether or not the display of the display unit (performance display device 152) responds to the operation of the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).

In this embodiment, the information on the set value (probability set value for display) is the same regardless of the set value (set value for work), and is information corresponding to the probability value that the game will result in a special result.

In the above configuration, there is no change in the information about the set value (probability set value for display) before and after the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed, but the intermediate data is displayed, so the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is displayed. display unit (performance display device 15
It is possible to identify whether the display of 2) is reacting.

In this embodiment, the intermediate information (intermediate data) is characterized by being information for turning off all light emitting members (LEDs) or information for turning on all light emitting members.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify a change from the information (probability setting value for display) regarding the setting value before change to the information (probability setting value for display) regarding the setting value after change.

In this embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has a plurality of digits, and intermediate information (
Intermediate data) is displayed in a digit different from the digit that displays the information on the set value (probability set value for display).

With the above configuration, the display of the intermediate data indicates that the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation, and the information about the set value (probability set value for display) is not deleted, so the information about the set value (for display) is not deleted. probability setting value) can be avoided.

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) displays information about the setting value (probability setting value for display) and additional information (Dp=
1) and can be displayed, and the setting change means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) is a second key for shifting to a setting variable state in which setting values (working setting values) can be changed. 2 switches (setting key switch 93), and the second switch (setting key switch 93) has a first state that allows transition to the variable setting state and a second state that terminates the variable setting state. The state can be varied, and the game control means (game control device 100) transmits (displays) additional information (Dp=1) together with information on the setting value (probability setting value for display) in the first state, Transmission (display) of additional information is stopped in the second state (dot data (Dp
=0)), and the intermediate information (intermediate data) is the additional information (dot data (Dp=1))
encompasses

With the above configuration, even if the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed while the settings are being changed, the LED (segment Dp) indicating that the settings are being changed is kept lit without being extinguished. It is possible to increase the reliability of the display showing

In the present embodiment, effect control means (effect control device 30
0), the production control means (production control device 300) controls the production based on the setting value (work setting value), and the game control means (game control device 100) changes the setting value after the change ( The information of the final work setting value, the probability setting value) is transmitted to the production control means (production control device 300).

With the above configuration, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the changed setting value, so that the interest in the gaming machine 10 can be improved by providing variation to the effect.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first and second embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to acceptance of input in the setting change state.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
First, with reference to FIG. 76, probability setting change/confirmation processing according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing according to the third embodiment.

The probability setting change/confirmation process according to the third embodiment includes the probability setting change/confirmation process according to the first embodiment.
In addition to confirmation processing, processing of A2601 and A2602 is added.

The game control device 100 performs the processing from step A2401 to step A2410 as described above in the probability setting change/confirmation processing according to the first embodiment, and then determines whether or not there is a predetermined switch input (A2601 ). The input of the predetermined switch is, for example, the input of the starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a), the gate switch 34a, and the prize winning port switches 35a to 35n. It should be noted that the inputs of the predetermined switches include interface chips (proximity I/F ) 12
1 may be included (see FIG. 3).

If there is a predetermined switch input (the result of A2601 is "Y"), the game control device 1
00 executes the processing corresponding to the switch input (A2602) and ends the probability setting change/confirmation processing.

In the processing corresponding to the switch input (A2602), the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 a switch input command indicating that there was a switch input. In addition, the production control device 300 receives a switch input command from the game control device 100 by the processing of step B3302 of the single-shot system command processing to be described later, and performs lighting of the starting opening LED and the like. Similarly, the game control device 100 uses the second driver 138b and the third driver 138
An on/off drive signal may be output to the batch display device 50 via c to turn on the batch display device 50 .

On the other hand, when there is no predetermined switch input (the result of A2601 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the probability setting change/confirmation process as it is.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

In addition to the single-shot command processing according to the first embodiment, processing of B3301 and B3302 is added to the single-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

The effect control device 300 performs the processing from step B1301 to step B1327 as described above in the single-shot command processing according to the first embodiment, and then, if the MODE section does not indicate a setting confirmation command (B1327 result is "N"), it is determined whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the switch input command (B3301). When the MODE section is within the range of the switch input command, the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 and determines that there is a switch input.

When the MODE part represents a switch input command (the result of B3301 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 executes the switch input time process (B3302), and then ends the single command process.

In the switch input time processing (B3302), the effect control device 300 lights the starting opening LED or displays a check item on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the switch input command. The production control device 300 sequentially lights the decorative LEDs when receiving the switch input command, and controls the movable accessories and the speakers 19 (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 1
9b) may be operated.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the switch input command (the result of B3301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 performs step B1329 and subsequent steps as described above in the single-shot system command processing according to the first embodiment. proceed with the processing of

[Hall/player setting mode processing]
Details of the hole/player setting mode process (B0011) in the main process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the procedure of hole/player setting mode processing according to the third embodiment. Hall/player setting mode processing activates a hall setting mode in which a person in charge of a hall (game parlor) can make various settings of the gaming machine 10 or a player setting mode in which a player can make various settings of the gaming machine 10. be able to.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hole setting mode (B0401
). It can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress when a hole setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set. When in the hole setting mode (the result of B0401 is "Y"), B0
406-B0416 is processed, and the effect button 25 (
Various settings and adjustments are made based on the operation of the effect button switch 25a and the touch panel 25b).

If the effect control device 300 is not in the hole setting mode (the result of B0401 is "N"
), and it is determined whether or not it is in the player setting mode (B0402). When a player setting mode in-progress flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the player is in the player setting mode. When it is in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is "Y"), the processing of B0420-B0425 is performed, and various settings and adjustments are made based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

If the effect control device 300 is not in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is "N"
), and it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting the hole setting mode are established (B0403). For example, when the operation of the production button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the production button input process (B0010) during customer waiting or setting change state, the hole setting mode start condition is met. It can be determined that Note that "waiting for customers" means, for example, a state in which a video for waiting customers (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41 . In addition, when the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened in the setting change state (when receiving an error / illegal command related to the front frame open error (B1316)), the effect button input process (B0010 )
The hole setting mode may be entered when the operation of the effect button 25 is detected as the operation signal. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is "N"), the process of B0417 is executed.

When the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0403 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hole setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hole setting mode. Start setting is performed (B0404). Then, the hole setting mode flag is set (B0405).

Next, the production control device 300 adjusts and sets the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the production button 25 by the person in charge of the hall (
B0406), hall LED luminance adjustment processing (B0407) for adjusting and setting the luminance of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, liquid crystal luminance for adjusting and setting the luminance of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41 Adjustment processing (B0408) and power saving setting processing (B0409) for setting power saving are executed. The set values regarding the volume of the speaker, the luminance of the LED, the luminance of the display device 41, and the set values regarding the power saving setting are the set values in the hall setting mode.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes logo color setting processing for setting the issue color of the logo accessory (B0410). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an operation input to confirm the setting (B0411
). The operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the production button 25 is the production button input process (B0010).
is detected, it can be determined that there has been an operation input to confirm the setting. If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated.

Production control device 300, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is "Y"
), and it is determined whether or not the factory settings have been fixed (B0412). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting at the time of shipment from the factory has been confirmed. If the factory settings have not been determined (the result of B0412 is "N"), the process proceeds to B0414. When the factory shipment settings are determined (the result of B0412 is "Y"), the factory shipment settings are executed to perform various settings and adjustments in the factory shipment settings (B0413). Factory settings are default settings stored in a memory such as the ROM 321 . Next, hall setting data (or hall adjustment data) such as sound volume and various luminances determined in B0406-B0410 and B0413 are written in a backup memory (eg, FeRAM 323) (B0414).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for ending screen drawing for the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, the hole setting mode flag is cleared (B0416).

When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied, the effect control device 300 (B040
3 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the player setting mode start condition is established (B0417).
). When the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) during customer waiting, it can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is established. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B
If the result of 0417 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0417 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B0418). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B0419).

Next, the effect control device 300, based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, player volume adjustment processing (B0420) to adjust the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, frame decoration device 18 and board decoration A player LED luminance adjustment process (B0421) for adjusting the luminance of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a later-described effect customization process for customizing (individually setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B0422).
Then, it is determined whether or not there is an operation input for confirming the setting (B0423). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0423 is "N"), the hole/player setting mode processing is terminated.
When there is a setting confirmation operation input (result of B0423 is "Y"), screen drawing end setting is performed to end screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode (B042).
4). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B0425). In addition, B042
Player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as sound volume and brightness determined in 0-B0421 may be deleted, so they are not written to the backup memory.

In the above, drawing update settings (such as updating highlighted items in the menu display) after entering the hole setting mode or the player setting mode are performed in the effect button input process (B
0010).

[Game board during setting change]
FIG. 79 is a front view of the game board 30 in the setting change state according to the third embodiment.

On the game board 30 (including the center case 40) according to the third embodiment, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of a board decoration device 46 capable of emitting light as shown in FIG. They are provided in front of and in front of the general prize winning port 35, respectively. The LED provided in front of the normal pattern starting gate 34 is the normal pattern starting gate LED 34L, and the LED provided in front of each general winning opening 35 is the general winning opening LED 35L.

When the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment enters the setting change state, it receives a command for changing the probability setting, and the display screen of the display device 41 indicates that it is in the setting change state. Characters are displayed (setting change information setting processing in B1326).

Here, when the game control device 100 is in the setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode), as described above in FIG.
In the process of 602, the gate switch 34a, which is an input different from the input related to the change of the set value, is
It functions as a control means capable of accepting inputs from the winning opening switches 35a to 35n.
Then, the game control device 100 includes the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n.
When the input from is received, the switch input command corresponding to the received input is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

Then, the effect control device 300, step B3301 of the single-shot system command processing of FIG.
In the process of B3302, when the switch input command from the game control device 100 is received, the LED of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command (normal figure start gate LED34
L and the general winning hole LED 35L) are lit or blinked.

Therefore, in the setting change state, by passing or winning a game ball through the normal figure start gate 34 or each general winning opening 35, the corresponding normal figure starting gate LED 34L or general winning opening LED 35L lights up or blinks, The operation can be easily checked, and the maintainability of the game machine 10 can be improved. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the game machine 10 at the time of shipment from the factory, so that an initial defective game machine 10 can be detected early.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is the LE of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command.
After lighting or blinking D (ordinary figure start gate LED34L and general winning opening LED35L), other LEDs that do not correspond may be lit or blinked in order. According to this aspect, simply by receiving any one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the LEDs of various board decoration devices 46, so maintenance of the game machine 10 is possible. can improve sexuality.

In addition, the game control device 100 includes a gate switch 34a and winning opening switches 35a to 35n.
The display units 51 to 60 (LED
Lamp, special figure 1 indicator 51, special figure 2 indicator 52, general figure display unit 53, special figure 1 reservation indicator 54
, special figure 2 suspension display 55, normal figure suspension display 56, first game state display unit 57, second game state display unit 58, third game state display unit 59, round display unit 60) appropriately lit or blinking You may let Incidentally, the game control device 100, after lighting or blinking the display portion (any of the display portions 51 to 60) of the batch display device 50 corresponding to the received input, all the display portions (display portions 51 to 60) may be turned on or blinked to check the operation of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the collective display device 50 (processing of A2602). Further, the operation check of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the collective display device 50 is not limited to the mode in which all the lights are lit or all the lights are blinking.

In addition, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 and performs the switch input processing (B3302), as shown in FIG. 79, the display device 41
The checklist may be displayed on the display screen of In the check table, for example, a normal operation check indication such as "○" is displayed in the item of each switch corresponding to the received input.

In addition, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 79, in response to the input of the game control device 100 starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a), starting the check table Normal operation checked display ("○") in the items of mouth 1 and start mouth 2
may be displayed.

In addition, an LED (starting winning opening LED 36L) of the board decoration device 46 is provided in front of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1, first starting winning area), and the LED is lit according to the corresponding switch input command. Or you may make it blink. Furthermore, the production control device 300
A speaker 19 (upper speaker 1
9a, lower speaker 19b) may be operated. At that time, the effect control device 300, for example, when receiving a switch input command corresponding to the gate switch 34a, can make a voice notification of "normal figure start gate!" You can make a voice announcement saying "General winning entrance!"

Furthermore, during the setting change, the game control device 100 receives a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 that is output when the front frame 12 or the like is open, and sends an error/illegal command to the effect control device 300. When the performance control device 300 receives the operation of the performance button 25 during transmission, the performance control device 300 determines that the processing of step B0403 of the hole/player setting mode processing has been established as described above with reference to FIG. Judge (the result of B0403 is "Y"
).

Therefore, since the production|presentation control apparatus 300 will perform the process after step B0404, hole setting can be performed now during setting change. In this way, the game control device 100
functions as control means capable of accepting a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 as an input different from the input relating to the change of the set value when in the setting change state. In addition, the production control device 300 receives an operation of the production button 25 in a state where the front frame 12 or the like is open, and receives an input related to the hole setting as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value during the setting change state, It functions as control means that can change the setting values of the hall setting (for example, speaker volume, LED brightness, etc.).

[Another example of the game board during the setting change]
FIG. 80 is another example of a front view of the game board 30 during setting change according to the third embodiment.

In the game board 30 of another example, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. The winning LED 38L and the second special variable winning LED 39L are also illuminated. The normal figure fluctuation winning LED 37L is an LED provided in front of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting port 2, second starting winning port). The first special variable winning LED 38L is an LED provided in front of the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning LED 39L is an LED provided in front of the second special variable winning device 39.

The normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39, which are being changed, are closed by a sliding opening/closing type movable member 37b and attacker type opening/closing doors 38c and 39c, respectively.

Therefore, the effect control device 300, for example, corresponds to pressing the effect button 25 or the like during setting change, lights or blinks the normal figure fluctuation winning LED 37L, the first special fluctuation winning prize LED 38L, or the second special fluctuation winning prize LED 39L can be made In addition, the normal figure fluctuation winning LED3
7L, the first special variable winning LED 38L, and the second special variable winning LED 39L may be turned on in order or simultaneously.

In addition, when there is a predetermined switch input (the result of A2601 is "Y"), the game control device 100 opens the movable member 37b and the opening/closing doors 38c and 39c, and the normal variable winning device 37 and the second The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 may be put in a state in which game balls can be directly won.

Furthermore, in the game board 30 of another example, the effect control device 300 can cause the upper effect unit LED40cL and the side effect unit LED40dL, which are the LEDs of the board decoration device 46, to emit light. The upper effect unit LED40cL is an L LED provided in the upper effect unit 40c.
It is ED. The side effect unit LED 40dL is an LED provided on the blade of the sword held by the character of the side effect unit 40d. The effect control device 300 turns on or blinks the upper effect unit LED40cL and the side effect unit LED40dL, for example, in response to pressing of the effect button 25 or the like during setting change. In addition, the upper production unit LED
The lighting of 40cL and the side effect unit LED 40dL may be performed sequentially or simultaneously.

In this way, by causing the LEDs of the accessories (decorative members) to emit light in addition to the LEDs of the winning openings and the winning devices, it is possible to easily check the operation of the LEDs of the accessories (decorative members). Maintainability can be improved. It should be noted that maintainability may be further improved by moving a movable accessory or the like as a device for effect during light emission so that it is possible to check whether the motor of the movable accessory or the like operates normally.

In addition, the effect control device 300, for example, corresponds to pressing the effect button 25 or the like during setting change, the lamp display device 80 (lamp display unit 1 ~
6 (LED)) may be combined to emit light.

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment includes identification information (identification information, special decorative pattern, first decorative pattern A to
C. When the stop result of a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays this special figure) is a special result (jackpot result), a special game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player is generated. It is possible. The game machine 10 includes control means (game control device 100,
Effect control device 300) and setting change means (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing setting values relating to game conditions. The control means can accept an input different from the input related to the change of the setting value when in the setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed by the setting change means.

According to such a game machine 10, when the setting value is changeable, the control means can receive inputs related to the management and maintenance of the game machine 10, such as hall settings and operation checks. The manageability and maintainability of the game machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) provides a predetermined input (front frame open When a signal from the detection switch 64 and a signal from the production button 25 are received, a setting value (a setting value in hole setting) different from the setting value can be changed during the setting change state.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, it is possible to change the setting values of the hall settings and the like as setting values different from the setting values relating to the game conditions when in the setting change state. It is possible to improve maintainability by In addition, since the setting change state is normally entered by the operation of the person in charge of the game hall (game parlor), by making it possible to change the setting value of the hall setting in the setting change state, the game hall can Unnecessary change of the setting value of the hole setting by a person who is not responsible for the hole setting can be suppressed.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment includes a light-emitting device capable of emitting light (the LED of the board decoration device 46 (
In particular, in addition to the first start winning port 36 and the LED in front of the second starting winning port), the collective display device 50
display units 51 to 60), a predetermined area provided in the game area 32 where the game ball can enter or pass through, and a detection means capable of detecting the entry or passage of the game ball into the predetermined area. . The control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) makes the light emitting device emit light when receiving an input from the detection means as a different input.

According to such a game machine 10, when the setting is changed, it is possible to easily check whether the various detection means can normally detect the game ball and whether the various light emitting devices can normally emit light. The maintainability of the machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, a plurality of light emitting devices (devices for effects such as LEDs of the board decoration device 46) are provided. Control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300)
It is possible to sequentially change the display of the plurality of light emitting devices to a predetermined display mode (e.g. light emission) during the setting change state.

According to such a game machine 10, for example, when the effect control device 300 receives any switch input command from the game control device 100, various light emitting devices (the board decoration device 46) are displayed during the setting change state. Since it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the LEDs, devices for effect), the maintainability of the game machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a performance device (the display device 41, the board decoration device 46, the lamp display device 80, etc.) capable of displaying a display related to the performance, and the game area 32, and a game ball is provided. Predetermined areas that can enter or pass through (normal figure starting gate 34, each general winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area), second starting winning opening of normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area), etc.), and detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switches 35a to 35n, starting opening switch, etc.) capable of detecting entry or passage of a game ball into a predetermined area. When receiving an input from the detection means as a different input, the control means can change the display of the performance device to a predetermined display mode (light emission of LED, display of normal operation checked display on the check table).

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, when in the setting change state, by passing or entering the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 34, each general winning opening 35, etc. as a predetermined area, the corresponding normal pattern To improve maintainability of a game machine 10 by easily performing an operation check because a starting gate LED 34L and a general winning hole LED 35L are lit or blinked and a check table for passing or entering a ball can be displayed on a display device 41.例文帳に追加can be done. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the game machine 10 at the time of shipment from the factory, so that an initial defective game machine 10 can be detected early.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment includes a performance device capable of executing performance (display device 41, LED of board decoration device 46, speaker 19, upper performance of board performance device 44 (movable accessory etc.) unit 40c, side effect unit 40d, etc.). Control means (production control device 300
) can operate the production device when in the setting change state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, the LED of the board decoration device 46 as a device for effect
In addition to the light emission of , the speaker 19 notifies the sound, and when the light is emitted, the movable accessory or the like is moved as a device for effect, so that when the setting is changed, the operation check of the LED of the board effect device 44 and the speaker It is possible to easily check the operation of motors such as 19 and movable accessories, thereby further improving maintainability of the game machine 10.例文帳に追加

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. Also, in the following embodiments,
The same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to the operation of the gaming machine 10 when power is restored after a power failure occurs during the special game state.

[Timing chart for normal operation in special game state]
First, with reference to FIG. 81, the timing of signal output and the like in the special game state of normal operation in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. in the special game state of normal operation according to the fourth embodiment.

First, as shown in FIG. 81, at time t1, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs, external information For example, a big win 1 signal and a big win 2 signal are output as signals relating to the start of the big win (special game state) saved in the output data area. The signal relating to the start of the big win is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and further to an external device (such as a hall computer). Specifically, the big win 1 signal and the big win 2 signal are started to be output when the stop result (display result) of the variable display game becomes the big win result (special result). Note that the gaming machine 10
remains powered on and the security signal is off.

If the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the big hit 1 signal is processed during special figure 1 display (Fig. 37
) fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (A5714) is saved in the external information output data area, or if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the special figure 2 display processing (Fig. 38) fanfare / It is saved in the external information output data area in the interval process transition setting process (A5816). The big win 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area in step A5709 of the special figure 1 displaying process (FIG. 37) when the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, or the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit. In the case of special figure 2 display processing (Fig. 38
) is saved in the external information output data area in step A5811.

When the first big win ends at time t2, the output of the big win 1 signal is turned off. Specifically, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is the end of the special game state, that is, the signal regarding the jackpot end is saved in the external information output data area by the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 40 and 41) after the round game. and turn off. On the other hand, after the end of the first jackpot, the time-saving state (general electric support state, specific game state) or probability variable state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state) is maintained, and the output of the two jackpot signals remains on. be done.

Specifically, when the off data of the jackpot 1 signal is the end of the jackpot by the special figure 1 variation display game, the step A6112 of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing (FIG. 40) is turned off to turn off the jackpot 1 signal. is saved in the external information output data area. In addition, when the off data of the jackpot 1 signal is the end of the jackpot by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, in order to turn off the jackpot 1 signal, external information Saved in the output data area.

The jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area in step A6501 of the jackpot end setting process 2 and continues to be output (ON state) when it becomes a time saving state after the jackpot ends.
In addition, when the jackpot 2 signal becomes a variable probability state after the jackpot ends, the jackpot end setting processing 3
is saved in the external information output data area at step A6801, and the output (on state) continues.

Subsequently, at time t3, when a big win occurs again, that is, when a second big win occurs, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned on.

At time t4, when the second big win ends, the output of the big win 1 signal is turned off. In addition, the second jackpot corresponds to the normal jackpot pattern (for example, 10R normal jackpot pattern), the time reduction determination data is data with time saving, and there is no specific area passing information (
The result of A6104 is "N") (No V winning), big hit end setting process 2 is executed (A6
103). Therefore, after the end of the second big hit, it will be in a time saving state (general electric support state).

After that, at time t5, when the variation display game in the time saving state reaches, for example, 100 times after the second big hit, the number of remaining games in the time saving state (the number of times of time reduction fluctuation) becomes 0 and the time saving state ends. do. At that time, the output of the 2 jackpot signals is turned off by saving the off data of the 2 jackpot signals in the external information output data area in step A5105 of the time reduction variation count update process. Further, when a game including a special game state or the like is performed in the normal operation in this manner, the power of the gaming machine 10 is maintained in an ON state, and the security signal remains OFF.

It should be noted that, unlike the above, when the probability variable state is entered after the second jackpot ends, the probability variable state ends when the fall lottery is won in the drop lottery process (Fig. 20), and at that time, the output of the jackpot 2 signal (
A3704), turned off.

[Timing chart for normal recovery after power outage in special game mode]
With reference to FIG. 82, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs during the special game state and the power is restored to normal state will be described. FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc., when a power failure occurs during the special game state according to the fourth embodiment and normal recovery is achieved by power restoration. In addition, in FIGS. 82 to 86 below, descriptions that overlap with the contents described in FIG. 81 and the like will be omitted as appropriate.

At time t1, similarly to FIG. 81 described above, when the first big win (special game state) occurs, the big win 1 signal and the big win 2 signal are output. Also, the security signal is kept off.

At time t11, when a power failure occurs during the first big hit (for example, during a round game), FIG.
2, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, and the jackpot game is interrupted. In addition, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off as the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

At time t12, when power is restored (recovery from power failure) and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the game machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by power failure recovery processing (A1045) of the main processing. The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved (stored) in the RAM at the time of power failure (A1057, A1058), and the game control device 100 outputs the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal when the power is restored. Save data (stored information) about the output state, that is, the jackpot state is held (maintained) internally. Therefore, the big win 1 signal and the big win 2 signal which were on before the power failure are turned on, and the first big win game is restarted.

When the first big win ends at time t13, the output of the big win 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big win, the time saving state (general electric support state) or probability variable state (specific game state, probability variable state) is established, and the output of the big win 2 signal is maintained in the ON state.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t14 to time t16 is
This is the same as the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above with reference to FIG.

Similarly, when a power failure occurs during the second big win, the time saving state, or the probability variable state, the big win 1 signal and the big win 2 signal are turned off. Then, when the power is restored and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the game machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure recovery processing (A1045) of the main processing, and the second big hit, the time saving state or the variable probability state is resumed. can do.

[Timing chart when a memory error occurs after a power failure in the special game state]
Referring to FIG. 83, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state and a memory abnormality occurs when the power is restored will be described. FIG. 83 shows the fourth
It is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs during the special game state according to the embodiment and a memory abnormality occurs when power is restored.

At time t1, the first big win (special game state) occurs and the big win 1 signal and the big win 2 signal are output in the same manner as in FIG. When it occurs, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are turned off together with the power of the game machine 10 being turned off.

At time t22, when the power is restored and the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the RAM (RA
When the memory abnormality of M111c) occurs, the output of the security signal is turned on. Specifically, by determining that the RAM abnormality flag is set in the main process (A102
2 is "Y"), security signal ON data is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 and jackpot 2 signals are turned off as signals other than the security signal (
A1026). In addition, while waiting by repeating the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), timer interrupt processing capable of executing special figure 1, 2 game processing and general figure game processing (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, games (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegality of the RAM abnormality from being reflected in the game.

The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal saved as save data (stored information) in the RAM at the time of power failure is read in the power failure recovery process at the time of power restoration. Therefore, at the time of normal recovery, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal can be output as indicated by broken lines in FIG. However, since a RAM memory abnormality has occurred, the game control device 100 turns on the security signal as indicated by the solid line in FIG. And the jackpot 2 signal is not output.

After that, at time t23, the power is turned off once, and when it is determined that the setting key switch 93 (setting key) and the RAM initialization switch 112 are pressed (on) when the power is turned on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) is entered, the probability setting value is cleared due to RAM abnormality (A1028), and the security signal is turned on (A1034). Then, the setting key switch 93 is turned off (A1036
When the setting change state ends, the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (RAM clear) (A1042) and initialized (A1043, A1044).
Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Furthermore, the memory abnormality of the gaming machine 10 is eliminated. On the other hand, the jackpot state is also reset, the gaming machine 10 enters the normal game state, and the stopped symbols also become lost symbols.

If a power outage occurs during the second jackpot, time-saving state, or variable-probability state, similarly, a memory abnormality occurs, the RAM is cleared and initialized, and the game machine 10 returns to the normal game state. Become.

[Timing chart when transitioning to setting confirmation state after power failure in special game state]
With reference to FIG. 84, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs during the special game state, and the timing of signal output, etc. when the power is restored to normal state and shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) will be described. do. FIG. 84 shows that a power failure occurs during the special game state according to the fourth embodiment,
4 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when the power is restored to the normal state and the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state.

After the first jackpot occurs at time t1 and the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are output in the same manner as in FIG.
When the power supply is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t32, when the setting key switch 93 of the game machine 10 is turned on (the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off) and the power supply of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting checking flag is set. (A1032), and the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting confirmation state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be confirmed (A1305).

When the setting confirmation state is entered at time t32, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 84 (A2406). On the other hand, the big win 1 signal and the big win 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as indicated by solid lines in FIG. 83 (A2406).

In addition, as described above in FIG. 83, the output state (ON state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the RAM at the time of power failure (A1057, A1058), and even at the time of power recovery.
4, save data relating to the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is held.

At time t33, the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (A1036
result is "Y"), the security signal is turned off when power failure recovery processing is performed (A1045).

In addition, the output state of the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal saved as save data (memory information) in the RAM at the time of a power failure is read and turned on by the power failure restoration process after the setting confirmation state is completed. Become. Therefore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the first big win game is restarted. Then, the same number of rounds as the jackpot game (special game) during normal operation without occurrence of power failure are consumed over the same time.

When the first big win ends at time t34, the output of the big win 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big win, the time saving state (general electric support state) or probability variable state (specific game state, probability variable state) is established, and the output of the big win 2 signal is maintained in the ON state.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big win from time t35 to time t36 is
This is the same as the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above with reference to FIG.

In addition, if the power failure occurs during the second jackpot, the time saving state or the variable probability state, and the power is restored and the setting confirmation state is entered, when the setting confirmation state is completed, the power failure recovery process of the main process (A1
045), the game machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure, and the second big hit, the time saving state, or the variable probability state can be restarted.

[Timing chart when transitioning to setting change state after power failure in special game state]
Referring to FIG. 85, in the fourth embodiment, when a power failure occurs during the special game state, normal restoration is performed upon restoration of power, and signal output, etc. when shifting to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). will explain the timing of FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc., when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, normal restoration is performed upon power restoration, and transition to the setting change state occurs.

After the first jackpot occurs at time t1 and the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are output in the same manner as in FIG.
When the power supply is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t42, when the setting key switch 93 of the game machine 10 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed (on) and the power is restored and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting is changed. A middle flag is set (A1029), and the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting change state in which the probability set value (set value) can be changed (A1305).

When the setting change state is entered at time t42, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 85 (A2406). On the other hand, the big win 1 signal and the big win 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as indicated by solid lines in FIG. 85 (A2406).

In addition, as described above in FIG. 83, the output state (ON state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the RAM at the time of power failure (A1057, A1058), and even at the time of power recovery.
5, save data relating to the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is held.

Then, at time t43, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (A10
36 result is "Y"), and the probability setting changing flag is set (A1040
result is "Y"), and the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (RAM clear) (
A1042) and initialized (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Therefore, when the setting change state ends, the game machine 10 is restored to normal, but the jackpot state is reset by RAM clearing to enter the normal game state, and the stop symbols become lost symbols.

Even if a power outage occurs during the second jackpot, the time saving state, or the variable probability state, similarly, when the setting change state ends, the RAM is cleared and initialized, and the gaming machine 10 returns to the normal game state. becomes.

[Timing chart when the power is turned off in the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 86, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs during the special game state, normal recovery is achieved by power restoration, and the power is turned off after shifting to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) Timing of signal output and the like when the signal is turned on will be described. FIG. 86 shows an example of the timing of signal output, etc., when power is turned off after a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, normal recovery is achieved by restoration of power, and the power is turned off after shifting to the setting change state. is a timing chart showing

The signal output when power is restored after the first big win occurs from time t1 to time t52 and the power is restored in the setting change state is the same as the signal output from time t1 to time t42 described above with reference to FIG. Note that at time t52, when shifting to the setting change state, at time t42 in FIG.
Similarly, a probability setting changing flag is set (A1029).

After that, at time t53, when the power is turned off in the setting change state (or power failure occurs again), the output of the security signal is turned off. Incidentally, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 85, save data relating to the output state (ON state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is held in the same manner as the dashed lines up to FIG. Also, since the save data saved in the RAM cannot be read when the power is turned off, the dashed lines of the big win 1 signal and the big win 2 signal are turned off when the power is turned off. Note that the probability setting changing flag remains set (A10
37 result is "Y", A1057, A1058).

At time t54, while the RAM initialization switch 112 is not turned on (A1021
result is "N"), and when the power is turned on, since the probability setting changing flag is set (result of A1023 is "Y"), the ON data of the security signal is output (A
1026). On the other hand, the big win 1 signal and the big win 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as indicated by solid lines in FIG. 86 (A1026). Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are output as save data in the RAM as indicated by broken lines in FIG.
ON state) is maintained, but is not output. Also, steps A1025 and A
While waiting by repeating the process of 1026, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, so the game (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected process (a process in which power is restored after a power failure in the setting change state) from being reflected in the game. After that, the RAM is cleared (A1042) in the same manner as at time t23 in FIG. 83, so that normal recovery can be achieved, and at that time, the jackpot state is reset.

[Functions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a special game state advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, special figure variation display game, variation display game) is a special result (jackpot result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating (jackpot game state) is provided. The gaming machine 10 is provided with holding storage means (RAM of the game control device 100) that stores information about games and can store and hold the stored information even if a power failure occurs. The control means is capable of outputting a signal (1 jackpot signal) triggered by the occurrence of the special game state, and held during restart processing when power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state. When an abnormality in the information recorded in the storage means is detected, a security signal is output to notify the abnormality, and a signal (jackpot 1
signal) is not output.

According to such a game machine 10, when an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during the restart processing when power is restored after a power failure occurs during the special game state, , does not output a signal (jackpot 1 signal) that is output when a special game state occurs, but outputs a security signal, so that when the power is restored, it is possible to notify that the game machine is being fraudulent. .
By reporting the fraud, the person in charge of the game parlor (game parlor) can take countermeasures against the fraud.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment also includes setting change means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing setting values (probability setting values) relating to game conditions. The control means (game control device 100) can output a signal (jackpot 1 signal) triggered by the occurrence of the special game state (jackpot game state), and after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state, the set value During the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure in the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) that can be changed, a security signal is output to notify the abnormality, and a signal (big win 1 signal) does not output

According to such a game machine 10, during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure in the setting change state, the signal (jackpot 1 signal) that is output when the special game state occurs is not output. , a security signal is output, so that it is possible to notify that an unexpected process is being performed on the game machine in the setting change state. With this notification, the person in charge of the game parlor (game parlor) can take measures against unexpected processing (processing in which the power is restored after a power failure in the setting change state) has been performed on the gaming machine.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment provides a special result advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, special figure variation display game, variation display game) is a special result (jackpot result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (jackpot game state) and a specific game state (time saving state, variable probability state) is provided. The gaming machine 10 stores information about games, and is a holding storage means (game control device 10) capable of storing and holding the stored information even if a power failure occurs
0 RAM). Control means, triggered by the occurrence of a special game state signal (jackpot 2 signal)
can be output, and the signal can be output until the specific game state after the special game state ends, and after a power failure during the occurrence of the special game state or the specific game state, when the power is restored When an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during the start-up process, a security signal for informing the abnormality is output, and no signal (jackpot 2 signal) is output.

According to such a game machine 10, after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state or the specific game state, during the restart process when the power is restored, the abnormality of the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected. When it is detected, the signal (jackpot 2 signal) that is output when the special game state occurs is not output, and the security signal is output. can be notified. By reporting the fraud, the person in charge of the game parlor (game parlor) can take countermeasures against the fraud.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment also includes setting change means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing setting values (probability setting values) relating to game conditions. Control means (game control device 100) can start outputting a signal (jackpot 2 signal) triggered by the occurrence of a special game state (jackpot game state), specific game state after the special game state (time saving state, variable probability state) The signal can be output until the end of the special game state or the setting change state (
During restart processing when power is restored after a power failure in setting change mode, setting variable state), a security signal for announcing an abnormality is output, and a signal (jackpot 2 signal) is not output.

According to such a game machine 10, during the restart process when power is restored after a power failure in the setting change state, the signal (jackpot 2 signal) that is output when the special game state occurs is not output. , a security signal is output, so that it is possible to notify that an unexpected process is being performed on the game machine in the setting change state. With this notification, the person in charge of the game parlor (game parlor) can take measures against unexpected processing (processing in which the power is restored after a power failure in the setting change state) has been performed on the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of its technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is possible to combine multiple embodiments. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

10 game machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning opening (first start winning area)
37 normal variable winning device 38 first special variable winning device 39 second special variable winning device 40 center case 41 display device 44 board effect device 46 board decoration device 50 collective display device (LED)
93 setting key switch 100 game control device (main board)
112 RAM initialization switch 152 performance display device 200 payout control device 300 effect control device (sub board)
400 power supply

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine equipped with control means capable of generating a game state advantageous to a player according to the result of a game,
display means capable of displaying an indication regarding the performance of the gaming machine calculated based on the input information;
a holding and storing means for storing the information about the game including the input information and the information about the performance , and capable of storing and holding the stored information even if a power failure occurs;
The control means is
capable of outputting a plurality of signals triggered by the occurrence of a game state advantageous to the player;
When an abnormality in the information relating to the game stored in the holding storage means is detected during restart processing when power is restored after a power failure occurs while the game state is advantageous to the player. , outputting a security signal for notifying the abnormality, and not outputting all of the plurality of signals ,
making it possible to start a game after the holding and storing means is initialized, making it possible to display a display related to the performance on the display means based on the information related to the performance stored before power is restored;
updating the input information in the holding storage means by a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle;
A gaming machine characterized in that the information about the performance in the holding storage means is updated in a state in which interrupts are prohibited . In a gaming machine equipped with control means capable of generating a game state advantageous to a player according to the result of a game,
display means capable of displaying an indication regarding the performance of the gaming machine calculated based on the input information;
a holding storage means for storing the information on the game including the input information and the information on the performance, and capable of storing and holding the stored information even if a power failure occurs;
a setting means capable of setting setting values relating to game conditions,
The control means is
capable of outputting a plurality of signals triggered by the occurrence of a game state advantageous to the player;
After a power failure occurs during the occurrence of a game state advantageous to the player, the power is restored as a settable state in which the set value can be set, and the power is restored again after the power is restored in the settable state. during processing, outputting a security signal for announcing an abnormality and not outputting all of the plurality of signals ;
The game can be started after the holding and storing means is initialized due to the settable state, and the display regarding the performance is displayed based on the information regarding the performance stored before the power is restored. be displayable on the means,
updating the input information in the holding storage means by a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle;
A gaming machine characterized in that the information about the performance in the holding storage means is updated in a state in which interrupts are prohibited .

Images